Aastra 41 001343 02 Users Manual 6700i, 6800i, And 9000i Series SIP IP Phones

4100134302 3d3e31cb-27ce-4397-ae7e-70cbe1bbb7d8 Aastra Telecom IP Phone 41-001343-02 User Guide |

2015-02-02

: Aastra Aastra-41-001343-02-Users-Manual-402236 aastra-41-001343-02-users-manual-402236 aastra pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 876

DownloadAastra Aastra-41-001343-02-Users-Manual- 6700i, 6800i, And 9000i Series SIP IP Phones Aastra-41-001343-02-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Aastra 6700i, 6800i, and 9000i Series
SIP IP Phones

Administrator Guide

Release 3.3.1 SP3

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Software License Agreement
Aastra, hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable
and non-exclusive, restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution
under the terms of this agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions.
Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display Software furnished in object code form.
Customer shall not modify, copy, reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or machine
readable form or language, derive source code without the express written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether or not part of
firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the
terms and conditions of this agreement. All rights reserved.
Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement to abide by the terms and conditions
contained herein. Removal or modification of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any
Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of this Agreement, shall automatically
terminate this license. If this Agreement is terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and
destroy or return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary information of Seller. In no event
shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for
loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.

ii

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Chapters and Appendices in this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Chapter 1:
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

IP Phone Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Model 6730i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Model 6731i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Model 6735i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Model 6737i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Model 6739i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Model 6753i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Model 6755i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Model 6863i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Model 6865i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Model 6867i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Model 9143i IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

Firmware Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

iii

Content
Configuration Server Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Firmware and Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Configuration File Precedence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Multiple Configuration Server Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Chapter 2:
Configuration Interface Methods

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Configuration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
IP Phone UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Aastra Web UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Configuration Files (Administrator Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Chapter 3:
Administrator Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

Administrator Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
IP Phone UI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Aastra Web UI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Configuration File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Phone Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Restarting Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Account Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

iv

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
Action URI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Configuration Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Firmware Update Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
TLS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
802.1x Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Chapter 4:
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Basic Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Advanced Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Global SIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Basic SIP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Advanced SIP Settings (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
RTCP Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Autodial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Configuration Server Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Chapter 5:
Configuring Operational Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

Operational Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Administrator Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

v

Content
Locking/Unlocking the Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Configurable Emergency Call Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
User Dial Plan Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Backlight Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Background Image on Idle Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Configurable Home/Idle Screen Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Picture ID Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Audio DHSG Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Configurable Bluetooth Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Audio Hi-Q on G.722 Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Wideband Audio Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Live Dialpad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Minimum Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Locking IP Phone Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Local Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Suppressing DTMF Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Display DTMF Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Filter Out Incoming DTMF Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Stuttered Dial Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
XML Beep Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Status Scroll Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Switch Focus to Ringing Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Call Hold Reminder (on Single Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Call Hold Reminder Timer & Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

vi

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
Message Waiting Indicator Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Customizable Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Request URI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
DND Key Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Call Forward Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)
and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Group Paging RTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Speeddial Key Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Ring Tones and Tone Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
No Service Congestion Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Priority Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Shifting of Softkey Positions for Busy States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Option to Remove the “More” Softkey when Not Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Increased Number of Displayed Characters for Softkey Line Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Press-and-Hold Speeddial Keypad Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
6867i Hard Key Reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Speeddial Prefixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
BLF Page Switch Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Configurable Display for Blank BLF/List Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Ring Signal Type for BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
BLF Subscription Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Speeddial/Conference Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Speeddial/MWI Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

vii

Content
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Do Not Disturb (DND). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166
BLA Support for Third-Party Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
Park/Pick Up Static and Programmable Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
Enhanced Park/Pickup Configuration Method (BroadSoft BroadWorks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-185
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-190
SIP Phone Diversion Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-219
Display Name Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-219
Displaying Call Destination for Incoming Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-221
Callers List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-221
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-224
Missed Calls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225
Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226
Customizable Directory List Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235
Visual Indicators for Voicemail on SCA-Configured Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-237
PIN and Authorization Code Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-238
XML Customized Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-239
XML Override for a Locked Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264
Configurable Indication of Terminated Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-266
Custom Ad-Hoc Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269
Conference/Transfer Support for Live Dial Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-270
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods,
used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-270
Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-272

Chapter 6:
Configuring Advanced Operational Features

viii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Advanced Operational Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
TR-069 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
SIP Message Sequence for Semi-Attended Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Update Caller ID During a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Auto-discovery Using mDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Single Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Missed Call Summary Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
As-Feature-Event Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Blacklist Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Whitelist Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Transport Layer Security (TLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
802.1x Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Symmetric UDP Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Symmetric TLS Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
GRUU and sip.instance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Configurable DNS Queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Switching Between Early Media and Local Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Enable Microphone During Early Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
“Call-Info” Header to 200ok Responses for Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Reason Header Field in SIP Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Configurable “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Optional Headers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Configurable SIP P-Asserted Identity (PAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Configurable Route Header in SIP Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Configurable Compact SIP Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

ix

Content
Reject INV or BYE when Unsupported Value in REQUIRE Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
XML URI for Key Press Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Domain Name System (DNS) Server Pre-caching Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Configurable Transport Protocol for SIP Services and RTCP Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Configurable Alphanumeric Input Order for Username Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Active Voice-over-IP (VoIP) Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and Assistant Services Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

Chapter 7:
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Encrypted Files on the IP Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Configuration File Encryption Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Vendor Configuration File Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4

Chapter 8:
Upgrading the Firmware

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Upgrading the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Using the Restart Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Using the Auto-Resync Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Chapter 9:
Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1

About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Module/Debug Level Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
WatchDog Task Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6

x

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
Error Messages Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Warning Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Configuration and Crash File Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Troubleshooting Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Why does my phone display “Application missing”? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
How do I restart the IP phone? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
How to reset a user’s password? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
How do I lock and unlock the phone? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Appendix A:
Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Setting Parameters in Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
DHCP Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Password Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Emergency Dial Plan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Emergency Call Behavior Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
User Dial Plan Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Aastra Web UI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Configuration Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Multiple Configuration Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Rport Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

xi

Content
Local SIP TLS Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
SIP STUN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
SIP TURN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
SIP Keep Alive Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
HTTPS Client and Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
RTCP Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Time and Date Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Time Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Backlight Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
Brightness Level Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
Background Image on Idle Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Configurable Home/Idle Screen Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Picture ID Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
DHSG Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
Bluetooth Support Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Wideband Audio Equalizer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Live Dialpad Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
SIP Outbound Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
Contact Header Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
SIP Basic, Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
Backup Outbound Proxy (Global Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
Backup Outbound Proxy (Per-line Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
BLA Support for MWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Centralized Conferencing Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Custom Ad-Hoc Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Conference/Transfer in Live Dial Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80

xii

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Advanced SIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
802.1x Support Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
Autodial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
Voicemail Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
SCA Voicemail Indicator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
Directory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Customizable Directory List Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Callers List Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Customizable Callers List and Services Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
Call Forward Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
Call Forward Key Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111
PIN Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
Missed Calls Indicator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
XML Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
Action URI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-116
XML SIP Notify Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
Polling Action URI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
No Service Congestion Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
Switch Focus to Ringing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
Call Hold Reminder Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
Message Waiting Indicator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

xiii

Content
Message Waiting Indicator Request URI Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
DND Key Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Priority Alert Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Bellcore Cadence Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
SIP Diversion Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
Display Name Customization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-133
Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134
Language Pack Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Display DTMF Digits Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Filter Out Incoming DTMF Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Enable Microphone During Early Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
Group Paging RTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
Disable User Login to Aastra Web UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-149
Minimum Ringer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150
Terminated Calls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-151
Mapping Key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152
Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153
Park and Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154

Softkey/Programmable Key/Keypad Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key/
Hard Key Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
Softkey Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-158
Shifting of Softkey Positions for Busy States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-164
Option to Remove the “More” Softkey when Not Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-164
Increase of Displayed Characters for Softkey Line Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
Programmable Key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166
Top Softkey Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170
Press-and-Hold Speeddial Keypad Key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-174
Handset Feature Key Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-175
Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i , M675i, and M680i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-177

xiv

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content
Hard Key Settings for 6867i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-182
Customizing the Key Type List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-185
Locking Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187
Locking the SAVE and DELETE Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-190
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192
BLF List URI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192
BLF Page Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192
Configurable Display for Blank BLF/List Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-193
Ring Splash Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-193

Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204
Expansion Module 1 through 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204

Advanced Operational Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Blind Transfer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Semi-Attended Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Update Caller ID Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206
Single Call Restriction Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206
Blacklist Duration Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207
Whitelist Proxy Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207
Options Key Redirection Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-209
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-209
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-209
Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210
Symmetric TLS Signaling Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210
User-Agent Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210
GRUU and sip.instance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-211
DNS Query Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-211
Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
Optional “Allow” and “Allow-Event” Headers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
P-Asserted Identity (PAI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
Route Header in SIP Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213
Compact SIP Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213
Rejection of INV or BYE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

xv

Content
Configuration Encryption Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214
DNS Host File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214
DNS Server Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214
SIP Services/RTCP Summary Reports Transport Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-216
Alphanumeric Input Order for Username Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-217
Active VoIP Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-218
BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and Assistant Services Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-219

Troubleshooting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
WatchDog Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224
Crash File Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224

Appendix B:
Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

Appendix C:
Sample Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Sample Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
6757i Sample Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
6757i CT Sample Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
6753i Sample Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20

Appendix D:
Sample BLF Softkey Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Sample BLF Softkey Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Asterisk/sipXecs BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

xvi

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Content

Appendix E:
Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1

Multiple Proxy Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2

Limited Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-1
Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-1
Warranty Repair Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-1
After Warranty Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-1

Limited Warranty (Australia Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-2
Repair Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-2
Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-2
Warranty Repair Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-3
After Warranty Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty-3

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Third-Party Copyright Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-1
Expat XML Parser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-1
M5T SIP Stack - M5T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-1
MD5 RSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-1
OpenSSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-2
libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-4
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-5
UPnP - Intel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copyright-5

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

xvii

Preface
This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic network setup, operation, and maintenance of
the Aastra 6700i (6730i, 6731i, 6735i, 6737i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT), 6800i (6863i, 6865i, and 6867i), and 9000i
(9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT) Series SIP IP Phones. It also includes details on the funtionality and configuration of the IP
phones.
Notes:
• Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in this guide.
• This guide will be updated periodically with new and/or updated information. For details on what features have been
added or updated, please refer to the Aastra  SIP IP Phone Release Notes.

Audience
This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and partners who need to understand how
to operate and maintain the IP phone on a SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information.
This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for system or network administrators. Prior
knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is recommended.

Documentation
The IP phone documentation suite consists of the following:
• Aastra  SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation and set-up instructions, information
on general features and functions, and basic options list customization. Included with the phone.
• Aastra Models 6700i, 6800i, and 9000i Series SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide – explains how to set the phone up
on the network, as well as advanced configuration instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide contains information
that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or network administrator.
• Aastra  SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly used features and functions for an
end user.
• Aastra  SIP IP Phone Release Notes – provides new features and documents issues resolved
for the SIP IP phones.
This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra  Installation Guide, the Aastra 
SIP IP Phone User Guides, and the Aastra  SIP IP Phone Release Notes.

xviii

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Preface

Chapters and Appendices in this Guide
This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:
For

Go to

An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation information

Chapter 1

IP Phone interface methods

Chapter 2

Administrator options information

Chapter 3

Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone

Chapter 4

Configuring operational information on the IP Phones

Chapter 5

Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones

Chapter 6

Encryption information

Chapter 7

Firmware upgrade information

Chapter 8

Troubleshooting solutions

Chapter 9

Configuration parameters

Appendix A

Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX

Appendix B

Sample configuration files

Appendix C

Sample BLF softkey settings

Appendix D

Sample multiple proxy server configuration

Appendix E

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

xix

Chapter 1
Overview
About this Chapter
This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information about installing the IP phone firmware. It
also describes the firmware and configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

IP Phone Models

page 1-2

Optional Accessories

page 1-4

Model 6730i IP Phone

page 1-7

Model 6731i IP Phone

page 1-10

Model 6735i IP Phone

page 1-13

Model 6737i IP Phone

page 1-16

Model 6739i IP Phone

page 1-28

Model 6753i IP Phone

page 1-22

Model 6755i IP Phone

page 1-25

Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones

page 1-28

Model 6863i IP Phone

page 1-33

Model 6865i IP Phone

page 1-35

Model 6867i IP Phone

page 1-38

Model 9143i IP Phone

page 1-41

Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones

page 1-44

Firmware Installation Information

page 1-49

Installation Considerations

page 1-49

Installation Requirements

page 1-49

Configuration Server Requirement

page 1-49

Firmware and Configuration Files

page 1-50

Configuration File Precedence

page 1-51

Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files

page 1-51

Multiple Configuration Server Support

page 1-52

1-1

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

IP Phone Models
Description
All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone.
All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and 6757i CT offers the base phone along
with a cordless extension.

References
For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your
specific model.
The following illustrations show the types of IP Phone Models.

6735i

6731i

6730i

6753i

6739i

6737i

6757i

6755i

6757i CT

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-2

IP Phone Models

6865i

6863i

6867i

Hold
Redi

al
Go
od
bye
Op

tio

ns

Op

Save
Conf

De

Dire
ctor
y

tions

948

0i

lete

Xfer

L3
L2

L1

Xfer
Co
nf

Ico
m

Mut
e
Serv

ice

9143i

s

9480i
Hold
Redi

al
Go

od
bye

Op

tio

ns

948

0i C

T

Xfer
Co
nf

Ico
m
Serv

ice

s

9480i CT

1-3

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Optional Accessories
6700 Series
The following are optional accessories specifically for the 6700i Series IP Phones.

6700i Wall Mount Kit
The following are optional accessories specifically for the 6731i, 6735i, 6737i, and 6739i IP Phones.

Power Adapter
The following are optional accessories specifically for the 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT IP Phones.

M670i Expansion Module
for 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i,
6757i, and 6757i CT

M675i Expansion Module
for 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6755i, 6757i,
and 6757i CT

The M670i module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i
CT. The M670i provides paper labels for each softkey. Up to 3 modules can be daisy-chained to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the phone when powered via the 48V AC adapter.
The M675i module adds 60 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
(using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit). The M675i module provides an LCD screen for displaying
softkey labels. Up to 3 modules can be daisy-chained to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the phone when powered via the 48V AC adapter.
Refer to the table below for additional daisy-chaining information.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-4

IP Phone Models
M670i/M675i Expansion Modules Daisy-Chaining Support
Maximum Number of Diasy-Chained
IP Phone Model Maximum Number of Diasy-Chained
Modules When Powered Via 48V AC Adapter Modules When Powered Via PoE

PoE Class

6730i

0

N/A

No PoE Support

6731i

0

0

Class 1 (<3.84W)

6735i

3

1

Class 2 (< 6.49W)

6737i

3

1

Class 2 (< 6.49W)

6739i

3

0

Class 0 (< 12.94W)

6753i

3

3

Class 0 (< 12.94W)

6755i

3

3

Class 0 (< 12.94W)

6757i

3

3

Class 0 (< 12.94W)

6757i CT

3

3

Class 0 (< 12.94W)

Note:
Daisy-chaining M670i modules with M675i modules is supported for all IP phone models except the 6753i (the 6753i
only supports the M670i expansion module).
Reference
For more information about installing the 6700i Wall Mount Kit and setting up and using the expansion modules, see the
6700i Wall Mount Kit Installation Guide, your  Installation Guide, as well as your 
IP Phone User Guide.

1-5

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6800i Series
The following are optional accessories specifically for the 6800i Series IP Phones.

6800i Wall Mount Kit

Power Adapter

The following are optional accessories specifically for the 6865i and 6867i IP Phones.

M680i Expansion Module
The M680i module adds 16 additional softkeys to the 6865i and 6867i IP phones and provides paper labels for each
softkey. Up to 3 modules can be daisy-chained to provide up to 48 additional softkeys for the phone. No separate power
adaptor is required as the M680i is powered by the respective IP phone.
M680i Expansion Modules Daisy-Chaining Support
Maximum Number of Diasy-Chained
IP Phone Model Maximum Number of Diasy-Chained
Modules When Powered Via 48V AC Adapter Modules When Powered Via PoE

PoE Class

6865i

3

3

Class 2 (< 6.49W)

6867i

3

3

Class 2 (< 6.49W) without modules.
Dynamically switches to Class 3
(< 12.95W) when modules are attached.

M680i Software Upgrades
The M680i does not require a separate firmware package. M680i software is embedded within the respective phone’s
firmware package.
When the M680i is connected and is powered up, the LED corresponding to the second button on the module will turn
solid red and the module will check to see if an upgrade is required. If it does not have the latest software, the module will
upgrade itself using the phone’s embedded firmware. This process will take approximately 10 seconds, in which case the
LED corresponding to the second button on the M680i will stay solid red for the duration. If the upgrade is successful, the
LED will turn green. If the LED stays solid and red for longer than 10 seconds, the upgrade may have failed. In such scenarios, unplug and reattach the power source from the phone to attempt the upgrade again.
As software upgrades are performed one at a time, each additional M680i connected increases the approximate upgrade
time by 10 seconds (e.g. three connected M680i expansion modules will take approximately 30 seconds to upgrade).
Reference
For more information about installing the 6800i Wall Mount Kit and setting up and using the M680i expansion module, see
the 6800i Wall Mount Kit Installation Guide, the M680i Expansion Module Installation Guide, M680i Expansion
Module Quick Start Guide, your  Installation Guide, as well as your  IP Phone User
Guide.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-6

IP Phone Models

Model 6730i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6730i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the
hard keys on the 6730i. The 6730i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6730i with Symbol or Text Keys
6730i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 3-line LCD screen
• 8 programmable top keys
• Press-and-hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 6 call lines with LEDs
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset mode support (via handset jack)
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-7

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6730i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Hold

Redial

Goodbye

Key Description
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice redials the last dialed
number.

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on
the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on the
phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options
List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key works as a backspace instead of a
moving cursor. the LEFT arrow key erases the digit/character at the cursor location including the dot/decimal.
The RIGHT arrow key sets the option.

Speaker

Speaker key - Transfers the active call to the speaker, allowing handsfree use of the phone. Switched
between headset and speaker depending on audio mode setting.

Options

Options key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have
already customized some of your settings.

Callers List key - Accesses the last 200 calls received.

Callers

Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Transfer key - Transfers the active call to another number.

Transfer

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-8

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Line 2

Key Description
Line/Call Appearance keys - Connect you to a line or call. The Aastra 6730i IP phone supports 2 line keys,
each with LED indicator lights. Additional lines (up to 6 in total) can be added to the programmable keys.

Line 1

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Programmable keys - 8 Top Keys - all 8 keys are programmable.
Keys 5 and 6 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively. These keys must be made configurable by the System Administrator before they can be changed.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6730i IP phone:
1 - None
2 - None
3 - None
4 - None
5 - SAVE - Allows you to save numbers (preconfigured) and/or names to the Directory. Using this key, you
enter the number, name, and line (or speed dial key) to record in the Directory List.
6 - DELETE - Allows you to delete entries (preconfigured) from the Directory List and Callers List. (Must enter
the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice to delete entry).
7 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names (preconfigured) and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order)
8 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features (preconfigured) and services through the Services menu.
Note:
For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 8 to perform specific functions,
see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6730i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

1-9

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 6731i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6731i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard
keys on the 6731i. The 6731i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6731i with Symbol or Text Keys
6731i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 3-line LCD screen
• 8 programmable top keys
• Press-and-hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 6 call lines with LEDs
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset mode support (via handset jack)
• Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters
• AC power adapter (optional equipment - not included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-10

IP Phone Models
6731i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Hold

Redial

Goodbye

Key Description
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice redials the last dialed
number.

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on
the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on the
phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the
Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key works as a backspace instead of a
moving cursor. the LEFT arrow key erases the digit/character at the cursor location including the dot/decimal. The RIGHT arrow key sets the option.

Speaker

Speaker key - Transfers the active call to the speaker, allowing handsfree use of the phone. Switched
between headset and speaker depending on audio mode setting.

Options

Options key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have
already customized some of your settings.

Callers List key - Accesses the last 200 calls received.

Callers

Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Transfer key - Transfers the active call to another number.

Transfer

1-11

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Line 2

Key Description
Line/Call Appearance keys - Connect you to a line or call. The Aastra 6731i IP phone supports 2 line keys,
each with LED indicator lights. Additional lines (up to 6 in total) can be added to the programmable keys.

Line 1

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

Programmable keys - 8 Top Keys - all 8 keys are programmable.
Keys 5 and 6 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively. These keys must be made configurable by the System Administrator before they can be changed.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6731i IP phone:
1 - None
2 - None
3 - None
4 - None
5 - SAVE - Allows you to save numbers (preconfigured) and/or names to the Directory. Using this key, you
enter the number, name, and line (or speed dial key) to record in the Directory List.
6 - DELETE - Allows you to delete entries (preconfigured) from the Directory List and Callers List. (Must enter
the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice to delete entry).
7 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names (preconfigured) and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical
order)
8 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features (preconfigured) and services through the Services menu.
Note:
For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 8 to perform specific functions,
see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6731i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-12

IP Phone Models

Model 6735i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6735i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the
hard keys, default programmable keys, and default softkeys on the 6735i. The 6735i is available with a symbol keypad or
a text keypad.

6735i with Symbol or Text Keys
6735i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 8-line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight
• 12 programmable keys
– 6 programmable hard keys on the top
– 6 programmable state-based softkeys on the bottom
• 4 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100/1000 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-13

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6735i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Goodbye

Options

Hold

Redial

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administratoronly options.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line 4

L3

Line 3

L2

Line 2

L1

Line 1

Speaker/
Headset

Mute

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6735i IP phone supports up to 4 line
keys.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages
on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on
the phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the
Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the
option.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-14

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable functions)
By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform
specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6735i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES -Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided
by third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY- Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST - Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM - Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - None
6 - None
Note:
For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions,
see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.
Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions).
By default, the bottom softkeys 2 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom
softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6735i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are
specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
1 - DIAL - Allows you to dial out on the phone.
2 - CONF - Begins a conference call with the active phone.
3 - XFER - Transfers the active call to another number.
Note:
For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion
Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6735i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

1-15

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 6737i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the 6737i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys
and default softkeys on the 6737i. The 6737i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6737i with Symbol or Text Keys
6737i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 11-line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight
• 12 multi-functional softkeys
– 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys
– 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys
• 4 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100/1000 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-16

IP Phone Models
6737i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Goodbye

Options

Hold

Redial

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administratoronly options.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials
the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line 4

L3

Line 3

L2

Line 2

L1

Line 1

Speaker/
Headset

Mute

1-17

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6737i IP phone supports up to 4 line
keys.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on
the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on the phone.
Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options
List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6737i IP Phone.
• 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions)
• 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions)
By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform
specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 6737i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided by
third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST - Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM - Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - None
6 - None
7 - None
By default, the bottom softkeys 8 through 12 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom
softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6737i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are
specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
7- DIAL - Allows you to dial out on the phone.
8- CONF - Begins a conference call with the active phone.
9- XFER - Transfers the active call to another number.
Note:
For more information about programming the softkeys to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module
Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6737i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-18

IP Phone Models

Model 6739i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6391i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the
hard keys on the 6739i. The 6739i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6739i with Symbol or Text Keys
6739i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• Large 5.7” full VGA (640x480) color touch screen display and backlight
• Advanced and expandable Executive Level SIP Phone
• Intuitive graphical user interface and navigation menus
• Two built-in 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch ports - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) standard) which eliminates power adapters
• Built-in Bluetooth technology for headset support
• Existing 675xi Expansion Module support
• USB port support (for future use)
• Aastra Hi-Q Audio™ Technology
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Additional headset connection options: modular RJ jack, built-in EHS/DHSG port (refer to the IP Phone 6739i Installation Guide for information on installing a DHSG headset on your phone.)
• Up to 9 lines with 3 call appearance lines with multi-proxy support
• Up to 55 programmable softkeys
• Picture ID feature (during calls and in the Directory, Callers List, and Redial List)
• XML support for productivity-enhancing applications
• AC power adapter (sold separately)

1-19

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6739i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
The following table identifies the keys on the key panel of your 6739i IP phone that you can use for handling calls. Your
phone may contain symbol keys or text keys, depending on which Model 6739i phone you purchased.
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Options

Key Description
Options Key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administratoronly options.

Callers List Key - Accesses a list of calls received by the phone.

Callers

Directory Key - Accesses a directory of names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).

Directory

Services Key - Accesses enhanced features and services set up by your System Administrator.

Services

Conference Key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

Transfer Key - Transfers the active call to another number.

Transfer

Hold

Redial

Hold Key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing or press the Hold key again.

Redial Key - Redials previously dialed numbers. Also accesses a Redial List of up to 100 stored numbers that
called your phone.

Goodbye Key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List.
Goodbye

Messages Key - Accesses your phone’s voice mailbox to retrieve and listen to stored messages.

Messages

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-20

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Line 3

Key Description
Line/Call Appearance Keys - Connect you to a line or call. The Aastra 6739i IP phone supports 3 line call
appearance keys.

Line 2
Line 1

Speaker/
Headset

Speakerphone/Headset Key - Activates handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset.
When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Volume Control Key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Mute

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

*See the Aastra Model 6739i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

1-21

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 6753i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6753i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the
hard keys and default programmable keys on the 6753i. The 6753i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6753i with Symbol or Text Keys
6753i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 3-line LCD screen
• 6 programmable top keys
• 3 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-22

IP Phone Models
6753i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Goodbye

Options

Hold

Redial

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administratoronly options.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6753i IP phone supports up to 3 line
keys.

L3

Line 3

L2

Line 2

L1

Line 1

Speaker

Mute

1-23

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages
on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on the
phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the
Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key works as a backspace instead of a
moving cursor. the LEFT arrow key erases the digit/character at the cursor location including the dot/decimal. The RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top Keys - all 6 keys are programmable.
Keys 1 and 2 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively. These keys are locked but can be
unlocked and made configurable if required by the System Administrator.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6753i IP phone:
1 - SAVE - Allows you to save numbers and/or names to theDirectory. Using this key, you enter the number,
name, and line (or speed dial key) to record in the Directory List.
2 - DELETE - Allows you to delete a single entry or all entries fromthe Directory List and Callers List.
3 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).
4 - CALLERS LIST - Accesses the last 200 calls received.
5 - TRANSFER - Transfers the active call to another number.
6 - CONFERENCE - Begins a conference call with the active call.
Notes:
• For more information about programming the SAVE and DELETE keys, see “Locking/Unlocking the SAVE
and DELETE keys” on page 5-51.
• For more information about configuring keys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion
Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6753i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-24

IP Phone Models

Model 6755i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6755i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the
hard keys, default programmable keys, and default softkeys on the 6755i. The 6755i is available with a symbol keypad or
a text keypad.

6755i with Symbol or Text Keys
6755i Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 8-line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight
• 12 programmable keys
– 6 programmable hard keys on the top
– 6 programmable state-based softkeys on the bottom
• 4 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-25

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6755i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Goodbye

Options

Hold

Redial

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already
customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously
redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line 4

L3

Line 3

L2

Line 2

L1

Line 1

Speaker/
Headset

Mute

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6755i IP phone supports up to 4 line
keys.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages
on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed
on the phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number
content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the
Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the
display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the
option.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-26

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable functions)
By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6755i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided
by third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST - Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM - Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - None
6 - None
Note:
For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module
Keys”.
Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions).
By default, the bottom softkeys 2 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom
softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6755i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are
specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
1 - DIAL - Allows you to dial out on the phone.
2 - CONF - Begins a conference call with the active phone.
3 - XFER - Transfers the active call to another number.
Note:
For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion
Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6755i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

1-27

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the 6757i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys
and default softkeys on the 6757i. The 6757i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.

6757i with Symbol or Text Keys

6757i CTwith Symbol or Text Keys

6757i and 6757i CT Phone Features (Symbol and Text)
• 11-line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight
• 12 multi-functional softkeys
– 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys
– 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys
• 4 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-28

IP Phone Models
6757i and 6757i CT Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Goodbye

Options

Hold

Redial

Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already
customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the
light that is flashing.

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously
redials the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

L4

Line 4

L3

Line 3

L2

Line 2

L1

Line 1

Speaker/
Headset

Mute

1-29

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6757i IP phone supports up to 4 line
keys.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Symbol Keys

Text Keys

Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages
on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed
on the phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number
content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the
Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the
display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the
option.
Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6757i IP Phone.
• 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions)
• 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions)
By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom,
respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are programmable and can be assigned
to perform specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 6757i IP phone:
1 - SERVICES - Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML applications and voicemail, provided by third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY - Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST - Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM - Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - None
6 - None
7 - None
By default, the bottom softkeys 8 through 12 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom
softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6757i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are
specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows:
7- DIAL - Allows you to dial out on the phone.
8- CONF - Begins a conference call with the active phone.
9- XFERT - ransfers the active call to another number.
Note:
For more information about programming the softkeys to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra Model 6757i or 6757i CT IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-30

IP Phone Models
6757i CT Cordless Handset Features
• 5-line backlit display screen
• 2 multi-functional softkeys
• Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
• Vibration Alerter
• Headset Jack
• Desk charging stand

10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

1-31

13
15
14
16

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6757i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions
Function #

Function Description

1

Receiver

2

Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left

3

Display

4

Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing

5

Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys

6

Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key

7

Dial Pad

8

Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you

9

Headset Jack

10

Status Light

11

Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists

12

Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing

13

Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed

14

Charging Jack

15

Charging Contacts

16

Microphone

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-32

IP Phone Models

Model 6863i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6863i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the
hard keys on the 6863i.

6863i Phone Features
• LCD screen
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Fast Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer
• 3 programmable keys
• Press-and-hold speeddial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 2 call lines with LEDs
• Wideband handset
• Wideband, full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• AC power adapter (sold separately)
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-33

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6863i Key Description
Key

Description
Navigation/Select Keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display
(if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the
Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow
you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT key erases the character
on the left; pressing the RIGHT key sets the option. Alternatively, pressing the center Select key sets the option as well on specific screens.
Options Key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.

Goodbye Key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Hold Key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Line/Call Appearance Keys - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6730i supports two line keys, each with LED indicator
lights.

Mute Key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on
mute).

Volume Controls - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Speaker Key - Transfers the active call to the speaker, allowing handsfree use of the phone.

Programmable Keys - When programmed, allows you to easily perform up to 3 specific functions (e.g. Services, Directory,
Intercom, etc...) and access enhanced services provided by third parties (e.g. XML applications). The programmable keys are
pre-configured as (from top to bottom) Callers, Redial, and Transfer keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-34

IP Phone Models

Model 6865i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6865i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the
hard keys on the 6865i.

6865i Phone Features
• LCD screen with backlight
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer
• 8 programmable top keys
• Press-and-hold speeddial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines with LEDs
• Wideband handset
• Wideband, full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset mode support
• AC power adapter (sold separately)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-35

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
6865i Key Description
Key

Description
Goodbye Key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.

Hold Key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.

Navigation/Select Keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display
(if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the
Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow
you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT key erases the character
on the left; pressing the RIGHT key sets the option. Alternatively, pressing the center Select key sets the option as well on specific screens.
Transfer Key - Transfers the active call to another number.

Conference Key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Options Key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.

Volume Controls - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Mute Key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on
mute).

Callers List Key - Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received.

Redial Key - Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice redials the last dialed
number.

Line/Call Appearance Keys - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6730i IP Phone supports two line keys, each with LED
indicator lights.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-36

IP Phone Models
Key

Description
Speaker/Headset Key - Transfers the active call to the speaker or headset, allowing handsfree use of the phone.

Programmable Keys - When programmed, allows you to easily perform up to 8 specific functions (e.g. Services, Directory,
Callers List, Intercom, etc...) and access enhanced services provided by third parties (e.g. XML applications).

1-37

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 6867i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6867i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard
keys on the 6867i.

6867i Phone Features
• 3.5” QVGA color TFT LCD with backlight
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer
• USB 2.0 port (100mA maximum)
• 6 programmable and 4 context-sensitive softkeys
• Press-and-hold speeddial key configuration feature
• Supports up to 9 call lines with LEDs
• Wideband handset
• Wideband, full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset mode support
• AC power adapter (sold separately)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-38

IP Phone Models
6867i Key Description
Key

Description
Goodbye Key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving
changes.

Hold Key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light that is
flashing.

Options Key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.

Mute Key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone
is on mute).

Volume Controls - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Callers List Key - Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received.

Redial Key - Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice redials the last dialed
number.

Line/Call Appearance Keys - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6730i IP Phone supports two line keys, each with
LED indicator lights.

Speaker/Headset Key - Transfers the active call to the speaker or headset, allowing handsfree use of the phone.

Directory Key - Accesses a directory of names and phone numbers (stored in alphabetical order).

Navigation/Select Keys - Multi-directional navigation keys allow you to navigate through the phone’s user interface.
Pressing the center Select key selects/sets options and performs various actions (such as dialing out when in the Directory, Callers, and Redial Lists).

Transfer Key - Transfers the active call to another number.

Conference Key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

1-39

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Key

Description
Presence Key - Accesses the partial and full contact presence information screens, which provide more detailed information about the selected contact.

Left Softkeys - 6 programable keys that allow you to easily perform up to 20 specific functions and access enhanced
services provided by third parties (e.g. XML applications).

Bottom Softkeys - 4 programmable keys that support up to 18 functions. These keys also act as state-based keys allowing you to easily perform context-senstive functions during specific states (i.e. when the phone is an idle, connected,
incoming, outgoing, or busy state).

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-40

IP Phone Models

Model 9143i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the
hard keys on the 9143i.

Options

Directory

Save

Delete

Conf

Xfer

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

*

0

#

L3

L2

L1

Mute

9143i Phone Features
• 3-line LCD screen
• 3 call appearance lines with LEDs
• 7 programmable keys
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with your computer
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

1-41

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
9143i Symbol and Text Key Descriptions*
Text Keys

Symbol Keys

Key Description
Navigation Keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text
messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also
let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote
number that is displayed on the phone. Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view
the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in
the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key works as a backspace
instead of a moving cursor. the LEFT arrow key erases the digit/character at the cursor location
including the dot/decimal. The RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Goodbye Key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List,
without saving changes.

Hold Key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance key beside
the light that is flashing.

Volume Control Key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Callers List Key - Allows you to access the Callers List that stores up to 200 of the last calls received.

Callers

Conference

Conf

Transfer

Xfer

Transfer Key - Allows you to perform blind or consultative transfer of an active call to another
number. In blind transfer, you transfer the call without waiting for the far end to answer. In consultative transfer, you wait for the far end to answer before transferring the call.

Redial Key - Redials a previously dialed number. The Redial key stores up to 100 previously dialed
numbers you can select from. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed
number.

Redial

Line 3

L3

Line 2

L2

Line 1

L1

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Conference Key - Allows you to begin a conference call(s) with the active call.

Line/Call Appearance Key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 9143i IP Phone supports up
to 3 line keys.

1-42

IP Phone Models
Text Keys

Symbol Keys

Key Description
Handsfree Key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset.
When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree
speakerphone.

Speaker / Headset

Options

Directory

Save

Options Key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Specific options are available to your
System Administrator only and are password protected. Contact your System Administrator for
more information about Administrator options.

Directory Key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is your personal phone
book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your
phone. Each entry can contain a maximum of 16 letters and
numbers.
Save Key - Allows you to save entries when storing numbers and names in Directory. Also allows
you to save Option settings when using the programmable keys.

Delete Key - Allows you to remove entries from the Redial, Directory, or Callers Lists.

Delete

Programmable Keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that key. You can program up
to 7 keys with a specific function.

Mute Key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes
when the microphone is on mute).

Mute

*See the Aastra Model 9143i IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

1-43

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models

Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones. It includes a list of features and
describes the hard keys on these models.

35i
Hold
Hold

Redial
edial

35i

Good
oodbye
Hold
Hold

Redial
edial

Good
oodbye

Options
Options
Options
Options

1

2 ABC

D EF
3 DEF

GHI
4 GHI

JKL
5 JKL

6 MNO

PQ RS
TU V
7 PQRS
8 TUV

9 WXYZYZ

*

0

#

Xfer
er

Icom
om

Conf
onf

Servi
vices
es

1

2 ABC

D EF
3 DEF

GHI
4 GHI

JKL
5 JKL

6 MNO

7

8

9 WXYZYZ

PQ RS
PQRS

*

0

TU V
TUV

#

er
Xfer

Icom
om

Conf
onf

L1

L2

L3

Servi
vices
es

L4

9480i

L1

L2

L3

L4

9480i CT

9480i and 9480i CT Phone Features
• 5-line graphical LCD screen with large backlit display
• 6 multi-functional, state-based softkeys
• Press-and-Hold speed dial key configuration feature
• 4 call appearance lines with LEDs
• Supports up to 9 call lines
• Speakerphone for handsfree calls
• Headset support (modular connector)
• Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with your computer.
• Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters.
• AC power adapter (included)
• Enhanced busy lamp fields*
• Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-44

IP Phone Models
9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys

Key Description

Good
oodbye

Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without
saving changes.

Options

Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.

Hold

Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call appearance button beside the light
that is flashing.

Redial

Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key twice simultaneously redials
the last dialed number.

Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and handsfree speaker.

Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the
audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.

Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the
microphone is on mute).

Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT IP phones support up
to 4 line keys.
L1

L2

L3

L4

Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on
the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These keys also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List, and scroll through a remote number that is displayed on the phone.
Users can press the scrolling DOWN navigation key to view the rest of the phone number content.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call appearances. While in the Options
List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.

Transfer key - Transfers an active call to another number.

Xfer
er
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.

Conf

1-45

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
Keys

Key Description

Icom
om

Servi
vicces

Icom key - Begins an intercom call to a remote extension and answers incoming intercom calls. The 9480i and
9480i CT IP Phones also have default softkey 4 configured as Icom.

Services key - Displays a list of Services available to your phone, if specific services have been configured. The
available Aastra services include Directory & Callers Log. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have default
softkey 1 configured as Services.
Note:
Availability of the services feature is dependant on your phone system and/or service provider.
Softkeys - 6 state-based softkeys on the 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones.
When you pick up the handset, the following displays on key 1:
Dial - After entering a phone number from the keypad, you can press the Dial softkey to immediately dial the
number.
Note:
For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

*See the Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT User Guides for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-46

IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Features
• 5-line backlit display screen
• 2 multi-functional softkeys
• Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
• Vibration Alerter
• Headset Jack
• Desk charging stand

10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

1-47

13
15
14
16

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions*
Function #

Function Description

1

Receiver

2

Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left

3

Display

4

Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing

5

Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys

6

Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key

7

Dial Pad

8

Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you

9

Headset Jack

10

Status Light

11

Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists

12

Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing

13

Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed

14

Charging Jack

15

Charging Contacts

16

Microphone

*See the Aastra Model 9480i CT IP Phone User Guide for more information about each of these keys.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-48

Firmware Installation Information

Firmware Installation Information
Description
The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the following:
• Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI)
• Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI)
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default. Depending on the type of configuration
server setup you may have, the IP phone may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download
it manually.

Installation Considerations
The following considerations must be made before connecting the IP phone to the network:
• If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server is enabled and running on your network.
• If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18 for manually setting up an IP address.
To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the  SIP IP Phone Installation Guide.

Installation Requirements
The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP phone:
• SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP account created for the IP phone
• Access to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server,
or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) (HTTPS)
• Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN (10/100 Mb) (Gigabit Ethernet LAN [1000 Mbps] recommended for Gigabit Ethernet compliant phones)
• Category 5/5e straight through cabling (Category 6 straight-through cabling recommended for Gigabit Ethernet compliant phones)
• Power source
– For Ethernet networks that supply inline power to the phone (IEEE 802.3af ) use an Ethernet cable to connect from
the phone directly to the network for power (no 48V AC power adapter required if using Power-over-Ethernet
[PoE])
– For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone:
Use the respective power adaptor to connect from the DC power port on the phone to a power source
or
Use a PoE power injector or a PoE switch

Configuration Server Requirement
A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server. The configuration server allows you to:
• Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone
• Stores configuration files for the IP phone

Reference
To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol
(SIP) Features”, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-87.
To update the firmware on your phone, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware”.

1-49

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Firmware and Configuration Files

Firmware and Configuration Files
Description
By default on startup, the phone downloads its firmware and configuration files from the configuration server you have
set; or you can manually download the firmware from the configuration server. The phone supports TFTP, FTP, HTTP and
HTTPS configuration servers.
Note:
Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server setup. For more information about manual and automatic download of firmware, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.” For more information on changing the download protocol on your phone, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-87.
The IP Phone firmware file (.st) include all the necessary files you need for your phone.
The firmware consists of the following file:
• .st - This file contains information about the specific IP Phone model and contains the language packs
to load to the phone.
The configuration files consist of three files called:
• aastra.cfg - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone.
• .cfg (for example, 6757i.cfg) - This file contains model specific information, where “model” should be the same
string that is used for the model name (e.g. 6730i.cfg, 6731i.cfg, 6735i.cfg, 6737i.cfg, 6739i.cfg, 6753i.cfg, 6755i.cfg,
6757i.cfg, 6757iCT.cfg, 6863i.cfg, 6865i.cfg, 6867i.cfg, 9143i.cfg, 9480i.cfg, 9480iCT.cfg).
• .cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone.
The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the configuration server during bootup of the phone:
IP Phone Model

Associated Firmware

Configuration Files

Language Files

9143i

9143i.st

aastra.cfg

9480i

9480i.st

9480i CT

9480iCT.st

.cfg
(for example,
6757i.cfg)

6730i

6730i.st

6731i

6731i.st

6735i

6735i.st

6737i

6737i.st

6739i

6739i.st

6753i

53i.st

6755i

55i.st

6757i

57i.st

6757i CT

57iCT.st

6863i

6863i.st

6865i

6865i.st

6867i

6867i.st

lang_cs.txt (Czech - UTF-8)
lang_cs_op.txt (Czech - ASCII)
lang_ct.txt (Catalan)
lang_ct_va.txt (Valencian)
lang_cy.txt (Welsh)
lang_de.txt (German)
lang_da.txt (Danish)
lang_es.txt (Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fi.txt (Finnish)
lang_fr.txt (French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt (Italian)
lang_nl.txt (Dutch)
lang_nl_nl.txt (Dutch - Netherlands)
lang_no.txt (Norwegian)
lang_pl.txt (Polish - ASCII)
lang_pl_pl.txt (Polish - UTF-8)
lang_pt.txt (Portuguese)
lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
lang_ro.txt (Romanian)
lang_ru.txt (Russian)
lang_sk.txt (Slovak - UTF-8)
lang_sk_op.txt (Slovak - ASCII)
lang_sv.txt(Swedish)
lang_tr.txt (Turkish)

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

.cfg
(for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg)

1-50

Firmware and Configuration Files
Reference
For more information about loading language files and using the various languages on the IP phone, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Language” on page 5-38.

Configuration File Precedence
Aastra IP phones can accept three sources of configuration data:
• The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the configuration server files, aastra.cfg/.cfg/.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/.tuz/.tuz encrypted equivalents)
• Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI
If the same parameter appears more than once in the above configuration files, the last parameter/value read will be
used (i.e., the following precedence rules will apply):
• Settings in the .cfg file can overwrite aastra.cfg settings
• Settings in the .cfg file can overwrite .cfg settings
In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied in the following sequence:
1. Default values hard-coded in the phone software
2. Values downloaded from the configuration server
3. Values stored locally on the phone
The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take effect.
For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value
was also set differently in one of the aastra.cfg/.cfg/.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the configuration.

Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
The following procedure describes how to install the firmware and configuration files.
1.

If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section
“DHCP” on page 4-3.

2.

Copy the firmware file .st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP phone accepts the new firmware file only
if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP phone.
Note:
The  attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 9143i.st, 9480i.st, 9480iCT.st, 6730i.st, 6731i.st, 6735i.st, 6737i.st, 6739i.st, 51i.st,
53i.st, 55i.st, 57i.st, 57iCT.st).

3.

Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg, .cfg, and .cfg) to the root directory of the configuration server.
Note:
The  attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone (i.e. 00085D030996.cfg).
The  represents a specific model of phone. (i.e.,6757i.cfg).

4.

1-51

Note:
Restart the IP phone as described in Chapter 3, “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-11.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Firmware and Configuration Files

Multiple Configuration Server Support
An Administrator has the option of specifying whether the phones get their firmware file, directory files, language packs,
TLS certificate files, 802.1x certificate files, and HTTPS files from the original configuration server or from another server in
the network. This feature allows you to specify the URL of other servers from which the phone can get this information.

Firmware Files and Multiple Configuration Servers
The firmware file for the phones can be downloaded from the original configuration server or from another server specified by a URL. You can specify a valid full or partial URL (server IP address) from which the phones get the firmware using a
new parameter called, “firmware server” in the configuration files. If a full URL is specified for this parameter, the phones
in the network get the security.tuz, aastra.cfg, .cfg, and .cfg files from the original configuration server, and
the firmware files from the server specified in the URL.
When the “firmware server” parameter specifies a partial URL path, the configuration server that is linked to the partial
path is used to load the firmware.
For example,
firmware server: /path

When there is no “firmware server” parameter (or if it is empty), the original configuration server is used to load the
firmware.
Note:
The default method for the download of all files and firmware to the phones is from the original configuration server.
The Administrator must specify a correct full or partial server URL for the phones to get their firmware information
from that server. If the URL is incorrect, no firmware download occurs to the phones from the specified server.
Examples
To download all configuration and firmware files from the original configuration server:
firmware server:

Leaving this parameter blank downloads all configuration and firmware files from the original configuration server.
To download all firmware files from another specified server:
firmware server: tftp://10.30.102.158/test1

The above example uses TFTP to download all firmware files that exist in the “test1” directory on the specified server, to
the phone.
Note:
Specifying the download of a “.st” file is not supported. For example, the following filename should NEVER be entered
as a value string for the “firmware server” parameter:
firmware server: tftp://10.30.102.158/test1/57i.st

To download a partial from another specified server:
firmware server: /path

The above example uses the configuration server that is linked to the partial path to load the firmware.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-52

Firmware and Configuration Files
Specifying a Server to Download Firmware Files
You can use the following parameter to specify a server other than the original configuration server from which the
phones get their firmware:
• firmware server
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter(s) you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Multiple Configuration
Server Settings” on page A-24.

Directory Files, Language Packs, TLS Certificates, 802.1x Certificates, HTTPS Files and Multiple
Configuration Servers
The directory files, language packs, TLS certificate files, 802.1x certificate files, and HTTPS files can also be downloaded to
the phone from a server other than the configuration server. For each of these types of files, you can specify a URL (server
IP address) from which the phone gets these files. You can use existing parameters on the phone to specify the URL. For
applicable parameters, see “Specifying a Server Using Existing Parameters on the IP Phones” on page 1-54.
The following table specifies the files that the original configuration server downloads, and the files that another server
can download to the phone.
Files always downloaded from original configuration server All files that can be downloaded from original configuration server
are, by order:
OR another specified server are, by order:
security.tuz
aastra.cfg/aastra.tuz
.cfg/.tuz
.cfg/.tuz

Directory Files
• directory 1
• directory 2
Language Pack Files
• language 1
• language 2
• language 3
• language 4
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate Files
• sips root and intermediate certificates
• sips local certificate
• sips private key
• sips trusted certificates
802.1x Security Authentication Certificate Files
• 802.1x root and intermediate certificates:
• 802.1x local certificate:
• 802.1x trusted certificates
HTTPS Files
• https user certificates

1-53

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Firmware and Configuration Files
Specifying a Server Using Existing Parameters on the IP Phones
The following table provides the parameters on the phone that you can use to download directory files, language packs,
TLS certificates, 802.1x certificates, and HTTPS files from the original configuration server OR from another server in the
network.
Type of File

Parameters that support the Multiple Configuration Server feature are:

Directory Files

directory 1:
directory 2:

Language Pack Files

language 1:
language 2:
language 3:
language 4:
Valid files names you can specify for languages are:
lang_cs.txt (Czech - UTF8)
lang_cs_op.txt (Czech - ASCII)
lang_ct.txt (Catalan)
lang_ct_va.txt (Valencian)
lang_cy.txt (Welsh)
lang_de.txt (German)
lang_da.txt (Danish)
lang_es.txt (Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fi.txt (Finnish)
lang_fr.txt (French)
lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
lang_it.txt (Italian)
lang_nl.txt (Dutch)
lang_nl_nl.txt (Dutch - Netherlands)
lang_no.txt (Norwegian)
lang_pl.txt (Polish - ASCII)
lang_pl_pl.txt (Polish - UTF8)
lang_pt.txt (Portuguese)
lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
lang_ro.txt (Romanian)
lang_ru.txt (Russian)
lang_sk.txt (Slovak - UTF8)
lang_sk_op.txt (Slovak - ASCII)
lang_sv.txt(Swedish)
lang_tr.txt (Turkish)

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate Files

sips root and intermediate certificates:
sips local certificate:
sips private key:
sips trusted certificates:

802.1x Security Authentication Certificate Files

802.1x root and intermediate certificates:
802.1x local certificate:
802.1x trusted certificates:

HTTPS Files

https user certificates

Reference
For more information on each of these parameters, refer to Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
Examples
Phone Directory Files
The following example downloads no directory:
directory 1:

The following example downloads a company directory from the original configuration server:
directory 1:companylist.csv

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

1-54

Firmware and Configuration Files
The following example downloads a company directory file from the specified server in the “path” directory:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv

Note:
To download a specific file, the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string. For example:
directory 1: tftp://10.30.102.158/path/companylist.csv

where “path” is the directory and “companylist.csv” is the filename. If you do not specify a filename, the download
fails.
Language Pack Files
The following example downloads no language pack file:
language 1:

The following example downloads the German language pack to the phones from the original configuration server:
language 1: lang_de.txt

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “lang_de.txt” (German language pack) from the “path”
directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50:
language 1:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/lang_de.txt

Transport Layer Security (TLS) Certificate Files
The following example downloads no local certificate file:
sips local certificate:

The following example downloads the local certificate file from the original configuration server.
sips local certificate: phonesLocalCert.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “phonesLocalCert.pem” (local certificate file) from the
“path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50.
sips local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/phonesLocalCert.pem

802.1x Security Authentication Certificate Files
The following example downloads no 802.1x local certificate file:
802.1x local certificate:

The following example downloads the 802.1x local certificate for the phone from the original configuration server.
802.1x local certificate: 8021xlocalCert.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “8021xlocalCert.pem” (802.1x local certificate file) from
the “path” directory on server 1.2.3.4 using port 50.
802.1x local certificate:ftp://admin:admin!@1.2.3.4:50/path/8021xlocalCert.pem

HTTPS User Certificate Files
The following example downloads no HTTPS user certificate files:
https user certificates:

The following example downloads the HTTPS user certificates for the phone from the original configuration server.
https user certificates: trustedCerts.pem

The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file “user.crt.pem” (https user certificate file) from the “test1”
directory on server 12.43.33.234 using port 50.
https user certificates: ftp://test:password@12.43.33.234:50/test1/user.crt.pem

1-55

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
About this Chapter
This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure the IP phones.
Note:
Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are specific to a particular phone model are indicated
where required in this guide.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Configuration Methods

page 2-2

IP Phone UI

page 2-2

Aastra Web UI

page 2-6

Configuration Files (Administrator Only)

page 2-14

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-1

Configuration Methods

Configuration Methods
Description
You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone:
• IP phone UI
• Aastra Web UI
• Configuration files
Note:
Not all parameters are available from all three methods. For more information about configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and Chapter 6.
The following paragraphs describe each method of configuring the IP Phone.

IP Phone UI
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and functions for using and configuring the IP
phone. Access to specific features and functions are restricted to the Administrator. A User can configure a subset of
these features and functions. Users of the IP phones should see their  IP Phone User Guide for available
features and functions.

Reference
Refer to Chapter 1, the section “IP Phone Models” on page 1-2 for keys specific to your phone model.
For more information about using the hard keys on each phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Locking IP Phone Keys” on
page 5-49.
For more information about the softkeys/programmable keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable
Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

Options Key
The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone. Accessible options in this list are for both User
and Administrator use. The Administrator must enter a password for administrator options.
Note:
An Administrator can apply a simplified options menu to the IP phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable
the use of an Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI. These features are configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about these features, see Chapter 3, the section, “Simplified IP Phone UI
Options Menu” on page page 3-4, and Chapter 5, the section, “Administrator Passwords” on page 5-7.
This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the user options in the "Options List", see
your  IP Phone User Guide.

2-2

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
The following illustrations indicate the location of the Options Key on each phone model.
Options Key

Options

9480i
Directory

Hold

Redial

Goodbye

Save

Options
Delete

Conf

1

2 ABC

4 GHI

5 JKL

3 DEF
6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

Xfer

1

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

7 PQRS 8 TUV

9 WXYZ

*

0

#

L3

L2

*

L1

0

#

Xfer

Icom

Conf

Mute

L1

Services

L2

L3

L4

9480i/9480i CT

9143i
Options Key
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

13
15
14
16

9480i CT Handset

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-3

Configuration Methods

Options Key

6739i

6731i

6730i

Options Key

6753i

6735i

6755i

Options Key
10
1
2
3
4
5
6

5
11
12

7

8
15
9

13
15
14
16

6757i CT Handset

6737i

2-4

6757i/6757i CT

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods

Options Key

6865i

6863i

6867i

Using the Options Key
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Use the 5 and2 to scroll through the list of options.

3.

On 3-line LCD phones:
To select an option, press the Enter softkey, the
option in the Option List.

button (if applicable), or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the

On 8 and 11-line LCD phones:
To select an option, press the Select softkey, press 4, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List.
4.

On 3-line LCD phones:
Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option, to save the change.
On 8 and 11-line LCD phones:
Use the Change softkey to change a selected option.

5.

Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option.

6.

Press the Cancel softkey, press 3, press

, or press

Good
oodbye

any time to exit without saving changes.

From the CT handsets:
1.

Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use.

2.

Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options.

3.
4.

To select and change an option, press the r keys.

Press y when done.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-5

Configuration Methods
Using the Options Key on the 6739i
1.

Press the

key on the phone to enter the Options List. A list of buttons display.

2.

Press an option button to display a list of additional options.

3.

Press a button to display the values for a selection or to display additional options.

4.

Press a value to set the option on your phone.

5.
6.

Press the
Press the

to return to the previous screen.
button or the

button at any time to return to the idle screen.

Using the Options Key on the 6867i
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Press the

key on the phone to enter the Options List.

Use the 3and 4 to scroll through the list of options.
To select an option, press the

button or Select softkey.

Change your desired settings and use the
Press the

key or the

button or Save softkey to apply and save your changes.

key at any time to return to the idle screen.

Aastra Web UI
An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI supports Internet
Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape.
Note:
An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI” on page 2-14.

2-6

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
HTTP/HTTPS Support
The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
Layer (HTTPS) client and server protocols.
HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound, video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an application protocol that runs on
top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the foundation protocols for the Internet).
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as the pages that are returned by the Web
server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. It
uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for
commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the
Internet. When a server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note:
HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP/IP lower layer. Both the HTTP and HTTPS
port numbers are configurable using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI and DHCP Option 66.
For more information about configuring these ports, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support
The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data transfers to perform over a secure connection
(HTTPS). The IP phones support the following:
• Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page content over a secure connection.
• Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection
• TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server
HTTPS Client
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
• Downloading of configuration files and firmware images
• Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a softkey definition
HTTPS Server
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set
of tasks. The main HTTPS server functions are:
• Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection
• Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection

Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature allows the user to continue using the phone
when there is a delay during an HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to respond. This feature
also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the phone is displaying
“Loading Page.......”.
Note:
This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key (softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action URIs are still blocking.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-7

Configuration Methods
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods for Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP Phones have authentication support as referenced in RFC 2617 when using HTTP or HTTPS as download protocols. If a 5i Series phone is challenged by an HTTP or HTTPS server when the server attempts to download the aastra.cfg
file, the phone automatically sends "aastra" as the default Username and Password back to the server. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)” on page 5-272.

Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI
HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window and enter an IP address or host name
for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays alerting the user that information exchanged
with the phone cannot be viewed or changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web
UI.
Notes:
• The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS
server during the SSL handshake.
• Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
- Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0)
- Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
- HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone

Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4, the sections:
• “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-87
• “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-33

2-8

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
Accessing the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI.
1.

Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
The following is an example of the Login screen that displays.

IP address or
host name

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-9

Configuration Methods
2.

Enter your username and password and click OK.
Note:
For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”.
For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank.
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
The Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is an example of a Status screen for the 6867i IP
phone.

3.

You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking Log Off.

Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories display in the side menu of the Aastra Web
UI: Status, Operation, Basic Settings, Advanced Settings.
Note:
Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, 6735i, 6753i, 6755i, 6863i, and 6865i. Softkeys apply to the 9480i,
9480i CT, 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, and 6867i. Expansion Modules apply to the 6735i, 6737i, 6739i,
6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, 6865i, and 6867i only.
Status
The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP phone. It also displays hardware and
firmware information about the IP phone. The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account
on the phone. The information in the Status window is read-only.

2-10

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
Operation
The Operation section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

User Password

Allows you to change user password.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Phone Lock

Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone, lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone
and to prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password.
Note:
You can also configure a softkey to use for locking/unlocking the phone.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Softkeys and XML

9480i/9480i CT - 6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6735i - 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6737i - 6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys / 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6755i - 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6739i - 55 state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6757i/6757i CT - 6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys / 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6867i - 6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys / 4 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Programmable Keys

9143i - 7 multi-functional programmable keys
6730i - 8 Top, multi-functional programmable keys
6731i - 8 Top, multi-functional programmable keys
6735i - 6 Top, multi-functional programmable keys
6753i - 6 Top, multi-functional, programmable keys
6755i - 6 Top multi-functional, programmable keys
6863i - 3 multi-functional, programmable keys
6865i - 8 multi-functional, programmable keys
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Expansion Module 

The M670i has up to 36 configurable keys. The M675i has up to 60 configurable keys. The M680i has up to 16 configurable keys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules attached to a single phone allowing you to configure
keys for Expansion Module 1, Expansion Module 2, and Expansion Module 3. See your  IP Phone
User Guide for applicable expansion modules for your model phone.
Note:
Expansion Modules apply to the 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, 6865i, and 6867i only.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Handset Keys
(9480i CT and 6757i CT only)

Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Keypad Speed Dial

Allows you to configure up to 9 speed dial keys. These fields map to the keypad digits 1 through 9 on the phone.
You can also configure additional speed dials on the programmable keys, softkeys and expansion modules. See
your  IP Phone User Guide for more information about this feature.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Directory

Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from your IP phone to your PC.
(Applicable to User and Administrator)

Reset

Allows you to restart the IP phone when required. (Applicable to User and Administrator).
This setting also allows you to set the IP phone back to its factory default settings or remove the local configuration. (Applicable Administrator only)

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-11

Configuration Methods
Basic Settings
The Basic Settings section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

Preferences

Allows you to set the following General specifications on the IP phone.
• Local Dial Plan (Admin Only)
• Send Dial Plan Terminator (Admin Only)
• Digit Timeout (Admin Only)
• Park Call
• Pick Up Parked Call
• Display DTMF Digits
• Play Call Waiting Tone
• Stuttered Dial Tone
• XML Beep Support
• Status Scroll Delay (seconds)
• Switch UI Focus to Ringing Line
• Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls
• Call Hold Reminder
• Call Waiting Tone Period
• Preferred Line
• Preferred Line Timeout (seconds)
• Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
• Message Waiting Indicator Line
• DND Key Mode
• Call Forward Key Mode
This section also allows you to set:
• Outgoing Intercom Settings (Admin Only; Administrator can enable these for a User if required)
• Incoming Intercom Settings
• Group Paging RTP Settings
• Key Mapping (Admin Only)
• Ring Tones
• Priority Alert Settings (Admin Only)
• Directed Call Pickup Settings (Admin Only)
• Auto Call Distribution Settings (Admin Only)
• Time and Date Settings
• Language Settings (Only the Admin can specify the language pack names to load to the phone). Both the Admin
and User can select the language type to display for the Web UI.

Account Configuration

2-12

Allows you to configure DND (Do Not Disturb) and/or Call Forwarding by specific account or by all accounts. Also
allows you to enable/disable specific states for each account, specify different phone numbers for call forwarding,
and specify number of rings for a “No Answer” state.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only)
The Advanced Settings section provides the following options:
Heading

Description

Network

Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced Network Settings, HTTPS Settings, Type of Service DSCP, and
VLAN settings.

Global SIP

Allows you to set global Basic SIP Authentication Settings, Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings, Realtime Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, Codec Preference List Settings, and Autodial Settings that apply to all lines on
the IP phone.

Lines 1 through 9

Allows you to set per-line Basic SIP Authentication Settings, Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings, Realtime Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial Settings that apply to specific lines on the IP phone.

Action URI

Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur.
An Administrator can also specify a URI to be called, enable polling for the URI, and specify the interval between
polls.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Configuration Server

Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure
automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Firmware Update

Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP phone from the configuration server using any of the
IP Phones supported protocols.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

TLS Support

Allows you to specify SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files, local certificate files, private key filename, and/or
trusted certificate filename to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

802.1x Support

Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol (Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP phones
for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

Troubleshooting

Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for
analyzing and troubleshooting. Also displays error messages if applicable.
Note:
You can also specify whether a user can upload system information automatically or manually by configuring a
parameter in the configuration files. For more information on this feature, see Chapter 9, the section“Configuration
and Crash File Retrieval” on page 9-9.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-13

Configuration Methods
Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI
The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if required using the configuration files.
System Administrators can also disable Users ability to login to the Aastra Web UI. With the Aastra Web UI disabled, users
will still be able to lock/unlock the phone with a PIN from the IP Phone. Administrators can disable the user Web UI using
the configuration file. System Administrators have the option to either disable the Web UI for both the Administrator and
User, enable for both the Administrator and User, or enable the Web UI only for the Administrator.Use the following procedure to enable and disable the Aastra Web UI.
To Disable the Aastra Web UI:
Configuration Files
1.

Using a text-based editing application, open the .cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a single phone. Open the aastra.cfg
file to disable the Web UI on all phones

2.

Enter the following parameter:
web interface enabled: 0
Note:
A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone for Administrators and Users. A value of (1) enables the Web UI for Administrators and
Users. A value of (2) enables the Web UI for administrators only.

3.

Save the changes and close the .cfg, .cfg or the aastra.cfg file.

4.

Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all phones.

Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to configure the IP phones. All parameters
in configuration files can only be set by an administrator.
You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following configuration files:
• aastra.cfg
• .cfg
• .cfg

References
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”
For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”

Using the Configuration Files
When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a text-based editing application to open
the configuration file (aastra.cfg, .cfg, or .cfg).
Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their settings in the configuration files.
Note:
Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to configuring parameters using the configuration files.

2-14

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods

Configuration Files
1.

Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to configure the directory list (either
aastra.cfg, .cfg, .cfg or all three).

2.

Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example,
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory

3.

Save the changes and close the configuration file.

4.

If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the
phone.

Locking Parameters in the Configuration File
The IP Phones allow you to lock individual configuration parameters to prevent an end user from changing the configuration on the phone. This feature allows service providers to prevent the end-user from changing the values of specific
parameters that would affect the service they provide.
An Administrator can lock parameters on the phone by placing an exclamation mark (!) before the parameter in the configuration file. For example,
!admin password: 22222
!emergency dial plan: 911|999

You can lock parameters on the phone using the configuration files. Once the parameters are locked, they cannot be
changed at all during the phones run-time. The parameters appear as read-only when accessing the Aastra Web UI and
the IP Phone UI. In the Aastra Web UI, they appear grayed out. In the IP Phone UI the ability to change the parameters is
removed. In addition, when parameters are locked, they cannot be changed via XML.
Notes:
• The “parameter locking” feature applies to Release 2.4 and up. Any phones that have a previous release loaded on the
phone will not be able to use the locking functionality in the configuration file.
• Any parameter duplicated in the .cfg from the aastra.cfg is overwritten by the locking status and the value
of the parameter found in the .cfg file. Parameters in the .cfg file overwrite parameters in the
.cfg and aastra.cfg files.
Limitations
• A User possessing the Administrator password can bypass the locking of configuration server details by defaulting the
phone.
• Softkeys can be locked and unlocked via XML in Release 3.3.1 and up using the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object
and softkeyN locked parameter (for more information about using the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object, contact
Aastra Customer Support regarding the Aastra XML Development Guide). All other parameters cannot be locked or
unlocked using XML.
• Configuration files that include locked parameters are not backwards compatible.

Overwriting Parameters with Defaults in the Configuration Files
An Administrator can specify a “ ^ “ (caret character) before a configuration parameter in the aastra.cfg, .cfg, and
.cfg configuration files, which allows the parameter to be overwritten and reset back to a specified value. This can
be convenient when changes are made by a user to specific parameters on the phone locally (via Aastra Web UI or IP
Phone UI), and the Administrator wants to set the parameters back to the default values using the configuration files.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-15

Configuration Methods
As an example, the following table describes how the parameter “sip proxy ip” is handled by the phone during phone
bootup when either the “ ^ “ (default parameter) is used or the “ ! “ (locked parameter) is used.
IF

THEN

new .cfg file is loaded to the phone with “^sip proxy ip” and any
other parameter(s) from the file specifying a “ ^ “

the “^sip proxy ip” and any other “ ^ “ parameters are overwritten if previously changed by the user.

new .cfg file is loaded to the phone with “^sip proxy ip” and any the “^sip proxy ip” and any other “ ^ “ parameters are overwritten if preother parameter(s) from the file specifying a “ ^ “
viously changed by the user.
new aastra.cfg file is loaded to the phone with “^sip proxy ip” and any
other parameter(s) from the file specifying a “ ^ “

the “^sip proxy ip” and any other “ ^ “ parameters are overwritten if previously changed by the user.

the first instance is “^sip proxy ip” and second instance is “!sip proxy ip” the value for the second instance of the parameter (“!sip proxy ip”) overin the aastra.cfg, .cfg, and/or .cfg file,
writes to the aastra.cfg, .cfg, and/or .cfg files previously on
the phone.

Notes:
• XML reboots take precedence over server.cfg values. Therefore, “ ^ “ parameters are ignored in the aastra.cfg file
during XML reboots.
• If a parameter has both a “ ^ “ and a “ ! “ preceding the same parameter (i.e., ^!sip proxy ip: pbx.company.com), then
theparameter is ignored and NOT overwritten.
Example 1
The following example illustrates the use of the “ ^ “ in the configuration files.
aastra.cfg
^sip
^sip
^sip
^sip

proxy ip: pbx.company.com
proxy port: 5060
registrar ip: pbx.company.com
registrar port: 5060

In the above example, if an Administrator indicates the “ ^ “ before the parameters in the aastra.cfg file, and then loads
the aastra.cfg file to the phone, these four parameters are reset to their default values, even if the parameters were previously changed on the phone.
Example 2
The following example illustrates the use of the “ ^ “ and “!” in the configuration files.
aastra.cfg
^sip
^sip
^sip
^sip

proxy ip: pbx.company.com
proxy port: 5060
registrar ip: pbx.company.com
registrar port: 5060

.cfg
!sip proxy ip: pbx.aastra.com

//this parameter is locked

!sip proxy port: 5062

//this parameter is locked

!sip registrar ip: pbx.aastra.com

//this parameter is locked

!sip registrar port: 5062

//this parameter is locked

.cfg
sip proxy port: 5064

//this parameter is unlocked

sip registrar port: 5064

//this parameter is unlocked

2-16

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Methods
With this configuration, on the Web UI, the "sip proxy ip" and "sip registrar ip” parameters cannot be modified (they are
grayed out), and the value is "pbx.aastra.com" since .cfg has overwritten aastra.cfg.
The "sip proxy port" and "sip registrar port" parameters can be modified through Web UI because .cfg has overwritten .cfg and aastra.cfg. On the Web UI, the value for these parameters is 5064.

Configuration Server Redundancy via DNS A Records
The phone sends a DNS query and in the DNS response, it accepts the first server IP address and contacts that server,
ignoring any additional IP addresses in the response. This allows service providers to manage load balancing (via the DNS
server putting different records first on each request), but does not provide redundancy.
The phones also provide support of multiple IP addresses being returned for the DNS lookup for server redundancy via
multiple DNS A record entries. The phone tries to contact the first server address it receives, but if this fails, it now tries to
contact the second server address, etc.
This feature supports all the download protocols (TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS).
Notes:
• Once the phone has failed over to a redundant server, it continues to use that server for all other server-related processes on the phone (i.e., firmware upgrades from the Web UI, boot-up process, etc.).
• If a server fails while downloading a file(s) to the phone, the phone performs the discovery process of finding a
redundant server that is available. When the boot is complete on the redundant server, the phone tries to download
the file(s) again from the previous server. The check-sync process also performs the same way when a server fails.
• The “Skip” softkey displays in the event of a network outage, the user can skip the configuration download and continue the boot.
• All server failovers and failed server IP addresses are logged in the “Error Messages” page on the IP Phone UI at
Options->Phone Status->Error Messages.
Limitation
In certain cases, the TFTP Protocol cannot distinguish between “server down” and “no file on server” error messages;
therefore, the failover in these instances may fail.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

2-17

Chapter 3
Administrator Options
About this Chapter
The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to change or set features and configuration information as required. For all
models, an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files to enter and change values.
Note:
Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files.
This chapter provides information about the available Administrator options.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Administrator Level Options

page 3-2

IP Phone UI Options

page 3-2

Aastra Web UI Options

page 3-6

Configuration File Options

page 3-8

Phone Status

page 3-8

Restarting Your Phone

page 3-11

Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration

page 3-13

Basic Settings

page 3-16

Account Configuration

page 3-27

Network Settings

page 3-27

Line Settings

page 3-44

Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys

page 3-45

Action URI

page 3-46

Configuration Server Settings

page 3-47

Firmware Update Features

page 3-51

TLS Support

page 3-51

802.1x Support

page 3-54

Troubleshooting

page 3-55

3-1

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

Administrator Level Options
Description
There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access. However, there are specific options that
an Administrator can access only. These options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP
phones in a network.
An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files.

IP Phone UI Options
Using the IP Phone UI, you can access the Administrator options at Options->Admin Menu using the default password of
"22222"
The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on all IP phones EXCEPT the 6739i and 6867i:
• Administrator Menu
– Configuration Server
– SIP Settings
– Network Settings
– Factory Default
– Erase Local Config
The 6739i uses graphical icons to display the Administrator (Advanced) options on the 6739i phone, as shown in the following illustration.
6739i Aastra IP Phone

Mon Jan 1
12 : 45pm

Options List

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Menu

Audio

Display

Live Dial

Set Time

Language

Bluetooth

Softkeys

Status

Advanced

Password

Restart

Lock

3-2

Administrator Level Options
The 6867i has an “Advanced” softkey, which when pressed gives access to the Administrator options.
6867i Aastra IP Phone

Administrator Menu

The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the 6739i and 6867i:
• Advanced Menu
–
–
–
–

Configuration Server
SIP Settings
Network Settings
Reset (includes options for “Erase Local Config” and “Factory Default”)

Note:
An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection on the IP phone UI for all
model phones. This is configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-14
References
For information about all other user options in the “Options Menu”, see your  IP Phone User Guide.
For procedures on configuring Administrator Options on the IP phone via the IP phone UI, see:
• Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features”
• Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
• Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”

3-3

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences between the full menu and the simplified menu.
Note:
When setting the “options simple menu” parameter, the menu changes in the Phone UI only. The Aastra Web UI is not
affected.
For all model phones EXCEPT the 6739i and 6867i:
Full Options Menu

Simplified Options Menu

Call Forward

Call Forward

Preferences

Preferences

Phone Status

Phone Status

Password

Removed

Administrator Menu

Removed

Restart Phone

Accessible through Phone Status

Phone Lock

Phone Lock

For the 6739i:
Full Options Menu

Simplified Options Menu

Audio

Audio

Display

Display

Set Time

Removed

Language

Removed

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Softkeys

Removed

Status

Status

Advanced

Removed

Password

Removed

Restart

Accessible through Status

Lock

Lock

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-4

Administrator Level Options
For the 6867i:
Full Options Menu

Simplified Options Menu

Language

Removed

Time and Date

Removed

Call Forward

Call Forward

Lock

Lock (Password Sub-Option Removed)

Status

Status

Audio

Audio

Display

Display

Dialpad

Removed

Restart

Restart

Warning!
When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings
become misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu to recover the network settings
from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings.

Configuring the Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
You can enable the simplified IP Phone UI Options menu using the configurations files only.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Simplified IP Phone UI
Options Menu” on page A-7.

3-5

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

Aastra Web UI Options
An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These options display after an Administrator logs
into the Web UI using a Web browser and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default
username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.) The column on
the left side of the screen indicates the configurable options. A User has limited configuration options as shown in the following illustrations.

Administrator Web UI Menu

User Web UI Menu

The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web UI (and are not available for the User to
configure):
• Operation->Reset
– Restore to Factory Defaults
– Remove Local Configuration Settings
• Basic Settings->Preferences->General
– Local Dial Plan
– Send Dial Plan Terminator
– Digit Timeout (seconds)
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled
by an Administrator)

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-6

Administrator Level Options
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Priority Alerting Settings
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings
• Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
–
–
–
–

Language 1 (entering language pack filename)
Language 2 (entering language pack filename)
Language 3 (entering language pack filename)
Language 4 (entering language pack filename)

• Advanced Settings
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Network
Global SIP
Line 1 through 9 Settings
Action URI
Configuration Server
Firmware Update
TLS Support
802.1x Support
Troubleshooting

References
For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the Aastra Web UI, see your  IP
Phone User Guide.
For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-11, and “Set
Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration” on page 3-13.
For more information about Advanced Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features.”
For procedures on configuring the Basic Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features.”

3-7

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

Configuration File Options
An Administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by an administrator.

References
For a procedure on using the configuration files, see Chapter 2, the section, “Configuration Files (Administrator Only)” on
page 2-1.
For a description of each parameter you can enter in the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”

Phone Status
The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware version of the IP phone.
You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.

Phone Status via IP Phone UI
In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the administrator and do not require a password
entry.
Phone Status All IP Phones Except the 6739i and 6867i
• IP&MAC Addresses
– Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone.
• LAN Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port.
• PC Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port.
• Firmware Info
– Displays information about the firmware and boot version that is currently installed on the IP phone.
• Error Messages
– Displays any error messages that occurred during the phone’s last reboot.
Phone Status for 6739i IP Phone
• Firmware
– Displays information about the firmware and boot version that is currently installed on the IP phone.
• Network
– IP&MAC Addresses
– Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone.
– LAN Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port.
– PC Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port.
• Error Msg
– Displays any error messages that occurred during the phone’s last reboot.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-8

Administrator Level Options
Phone Status for 6867i IP Phone
• Firmware Info
– Displays information about the firmware and boot version that is currently installed on the IP phone.
• Network
– IP Address
– Displays the IP address of the phone.
– MAC Address
– Displays the MAC address of the phone.
– LAN Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port.
– PC Port
– Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port.
• Storage
– Displays the number of Directory, Callers, and Redial List entries saved on the phone.
• Error Messages
– Displays any error messages that occurred during the phone’s last reboot.

Phone Status via Aastra Web UI
The first screen that displays after logging into the Aastra Web UI for a phone is the Status screen. This screen also displays when selecting Status->System Information. The information on this screen is available to the user and the
administrator as read-only.

3-9

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
The following is a description of the information on the Status screen:
• Network Status
– Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You can also view the phone’s IP and MAC
addresses. Information in this field includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1.
• Hardware Information
– Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.
• Firmware Information
– Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP phone. Information in this field includes
Firmware Version, Firmware Release Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time.
• SIP Status
– Displays information about the SIP registration status of the phone. If there are accounts configured on the IP Phone,
their SIP status displays in this field. All model phones display the status of up to 9 lines.
The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an account(s).
Status Condition

Description

Registered

Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy server.
Example:

Line
1

SIP Account
650@proxy.com:5060

Status
Registered

Backup
Registrar
Used?
Yes

where
Account Number is “1”
SIP Account is “650@proxy.com” on port “5060”
Status is “Registered”
Backup registrar is used (“Yes”)
SIP Error Number

Displays on accounts when registration fails with the SIP proxy server.
Example:
Line
4

SIP Account
653@proxy.com:5060

Status
401

Backup
Registrar
Used?
No

where
Account Number is “4”
SIP Account is “653@proxy.com” on port “5060”
Status is “401” - Unregistered if SIP registration fails.
Backup registrar is used (“No”)

Note:
The IP Phones can register with multiple server using the same user name. So the SIP Status information on the Status
screen may display the same account with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. For more information, see

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-10

Administrator Level Options

Restarting Your Phone
As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone. The Restart option allows you reboot
the phone when required. A reset may be necessary when:
• There is a change in your network, OR
• To re-load modified configuration files, OR
• If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified.
You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.

Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Restart Phone.

3.

For 3-Line LCD Displays:
Press # to confirm.
Note:
To cancel the Restart, press the 3key.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
Press Restart.
Note:
To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Restart button. A “Restart the Phone?” prompt displays.

3.

Press Yes to restart the phone, or No to cancel the restart function.

For the 6867i:
1.
2.
3.

3-11

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Navigate to the Restart option and press the

button or Select softkey. A “Restart Phone?” prompt displays.

Select Yes using the
button or press the Restart softkey to restart the phone. Press No using the
to cancel the restart function.

button or the Cancel softkey

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.

2.

Click Restart to restart the phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-12

Administrator Level Options

Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s configuration using the IP Phone UI or the
Aastra Web UI.

Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone
Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the factory. The factory default settings
on the phone sets the factory defaults for all of the settings in the aastra.cfg, .cfg, .cfg, and local configuration. Performing this action results in losing all user-modified settings. You can reset a phone to factory defaults using
the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3.

Select Factory Default.

4.

For 3-Line LCD Displays:
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Phones:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced button. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard, and press . Default is “22222”.

4.

Press the Reset button. A “Reset Configuration?” prompt displays.

5.

Press the Factory Default button.
The phone immediately resets to factory defaults and the phone reboots.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.

4.
5.

Navigate to the Reset option and press the
Select Factory Default using the

button or Select softkey.

button or press the Select softkey.

The phone immediately resets to factory defaults and the phone reboots.

3-13

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2.

In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click Restore.
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.

Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration
You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local configuration is the last updated configuration you
performed using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently user-modified
settings. For more information about local configuration, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on
page 1-51.
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).

3.

Select Erase Local Config.

4.

For 3-Line LCD Displays:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced button. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard, and press . Default is “22222”.

4.

Press the Reset button. A “Reset Configuration?” prompt displays.

5.

Press the Erase Local Cfg. button.
The phone immediately erases the local configuration on the phone and the phone reboots.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-14

Administrator Level Options

IP Phone UI
4.
5.

Navigate to the Reset option and press the
Select Erase Local Cfg. using the

button or Select softkey.

button or press the Select softkey.

The phone immediately erases the local configuration on the phone and the phone reboots.

Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.

2.

In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click Remove.
This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.

3-15

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

Basic Settings
An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and manage the IP Phone in the network. The
following sections identify the options available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and Administrator.
These tables also identify whether you can configure them using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files.

General Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

Local Dial Plan

sip dial plan

A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach
a particular telephone number. Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters.
For more information on this feature, see “Local Dial Plan” on page 5-52.

Send Dial Plan Terminator

sip dial plan terminator

Specifies whether or not pressing the hash/pound (i.e. "#") key, while performing an
outgoing call on an open line, should be sent as %23 to the proxy in the dial string or
if the key should be used as a dial plan terminator (i.e. dials out the call immediately).
For more information on this feature, see “SIP Dial Plan Terminator” on page 5-53.

Digit Timeout

sip digit timeout

Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the timeout between consecutive key
presses.
For more information on this feature, see. “Digit Timeout” on page 5-53.

Park Call

sip lineN park pickup config

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

The parking of a live call to a specific extension.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is available on all phones EXCEPT
the 9143i, 6753i, 6863i, and 6865i.
To configure the Park feature on a key, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park/Pick Up Static
and Programmable Configuration” on page 5-177.

Pick Up Parked Call

sip lineN park pickup config

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Picking up a parked call at the specified extension.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is available on all phones EXCEPT
the 9143i, 6753i, 6863i, and 6865i.
To configure the Pickup feature on a key, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park/Pick Up
Static and Programmable Configuration” on page 5-177.

N/A

suppress dtmf playback

Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from
the softkeys or programmable keys.
For more information on this feature, see. “Suppressing DTMF Playback” on page 555.

Display DTMF Digits

display dtmf digits

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Play Call Waiting Tone

For more information on this feature, see. “Display DTMF Digits” on page 5-55.
call waiting tone

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Stuttered Dial Tone
Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on the IP phone display during a connected state.

Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an active call
and a new call comes into the phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-58.

stutter disabled

Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Stuttered Dial Tone” on page 5-61.

3-16

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

XML Beep Support

xml beep notification

Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a status on the phone. When the
phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying.

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Status Scroll Delay (seconds)

For more information on this feature, see “XML Beep Support” on page 5-62.
xml status scroll delay

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Switch UI Focus to Ringing
Line

For more information on this feature, see “Status Scroll Delay” on page 5-63.
switch focus to ringing line

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Call Hold Reminder During
Active Calls

Enables or disables whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while the
phone is in the connected state.
For more information on this feature, see “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page 564.

call hold reminder during
active calls

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Call Hold Reminder

Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status
message on the phone.

Enables or disables the ability for the phone to initiate a continuous reminder tone
on the active call when another call is on hold. When this feature is disabled, a ring
splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold.
For more information on this feature, see “Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls” on
page 5-65.

call hold reminder

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Enables or disables the reminder ring splash timer to start as soon as you put a call on
hold (even when no other calls are active on the phone). When enabled, the phone
initiates a reminder ring splash periodically for the single call on hold. When disabled,
no reminder ring splash is audible.
For more information on this feature, see “Call Hold Reminder (on Single Hold)” on
page 5-66.

call hold reminder timer
Note:
This option can be set by an
Administrator only.

Specifies the time delay, in seconds, that a ring splash is heard on an active call when
another call was placed on hold. For example, if a call comes into Line 1, and then a
call comes into Line 2 and you answer Line 2, Line 1 is automatically placed on hold.
While on the active Line 2, after 7 seconds, a ring splash audio sounds on the line
reminding you that the call on Line 1 is still on hold. This timer begins to increment
after Line 2 is answered.
Notes:
• This parameter is used with the “call hold reminder frequency” parameter.
• You must enable this “call hold reminder timer” parameter for it to work.
• A value of “0” disables the call hold reminder feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Call Hold Reminder Timer & Frequency” on
page 5-67.

call hold reminder frequency
Note:
This option can be set by an
Administrator only.

Specifies the time interval, in seconds, between each ring splash sound on the active
line. For example, if a call comes into Line 1, and then a call comes into Line 2 and you
answer Line 2, Line 1 is automatically placed on hold. While on the active Line 2, after
7 seconds, a ring splash audio sounds on the line reminding you that the call on Line
1 is still on hold (determined by the “call hold reminder timer” parameter), and then
the ring splash is heard again after 60 seconds (determined by this parameter).
Notes:
• You must enable the “call hold reminder” and/or “call hold reminder during active
calls” parameter(s), and the “call hold reminder timer” parameter, for this parameter
to work.
• A value of “0” prevents additional rings.
For more information on this feature, see “Call Hold Reminder Timer & Frequency” on
page 5-67.

3-17

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

Call Waiting Tone Period

call waiting tone period

Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the call waiting tone is audible on an active
call when another call comes in. When enabled, the call waiting tone plays at regular
intervals for the amount of time set for this parameter. For example, if set to “30” the
call waiting tone plays every 30 seconds. When set to “0”, the call waiting tone is audible only once on the active call.

Note:
This option can be set by an
Administrator only.

For more information on this feature, see “Call Waiting Tone Period” on page 5-59.
Preferred Line

preferred line

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Preferred Line Timeout (seconds)

For more information on this feature, see “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout”
on page 5-68.
preferred line timeout

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call

goodbye key cancels incoming Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone.
call
For more information on this feature, see “Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call” on
page 5-69.

mwi led line

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
DND Key Mode

dnd key mode

Allows you to configure the DND mode to use on the phone (Account, Phone, Custom) when the DND key is pressed. You can configure DND for all accounts or a specific account.
For more information on this feature, see “DND Key Mode” on page 5-73. Also see
Chapter 5, the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-154.

call forward key mode

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
N/A

Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) on a single line or on all
lines on the phone. For example, if you set this parameter to 3, the LED illuminates if
a voicemail is pending on line 3. If you set this parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if
a voicemail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
For more information on this feature, see “Message Waiting Indicator Line” on
page 5-71.

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Call Forward Key Mode

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred line
after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration of inactivity
on an active line.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout”
on page 5-68.

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Message Waiting Indicator
Line

Specifies the preferred line to switch focus back to when incoming or outgoing calls
end on the phone.

Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use on the phone (Account, Phone,
or Custom). You can configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific account.
For more information on this feature, see “Call Forward Mode” on page 5-75. Also see
Chapter 5, the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-190.

use lldp elin

Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Caution:
In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings.
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number
(ELIN)” on page 5-77.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-18

Administrator Level Options
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls
The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify whether the IP phone or the server is responsible
for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for server-side
Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the Intercom call.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

Incoming Intercom Settings (all models)
Auto-Answer

sip allow auto answer

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Microphone Mute

For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.
sip intercom mute mic

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Play Warning Tone

Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone for Intercom calls made by the
originating caller.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

sip intercom warning tone

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.
Allow Barge In

Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an Intercom call. If
auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to alert the user
before answering the intercom call. If auto-answer is disabled, the phone treats the
incoming intercom call as a normal call.

Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the phone receives an incoming
intercom call on an active line.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

sip intercom allow barge in

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming intercom calls while the phone
is on an active call.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

Outgoing Intercom Settings (8, 11-Line LCD, and 6739i and 6867i phones)
Type

sip intercom type

Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. Applicable settings are Phone-Side, ServerSide, OFF.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

Prefix Code

sip intercom prefix code

The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom calls. This
parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

Line

sip intercom line

Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the configuration from, when making
the Intercom call. The IP phone uses the first available line for physically making the
call but uses the configuration from the line you set for this parameter.
Note:
The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set with the Server-Side option to enable
the "sip intercom line" parameter.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with AutoAnswer and Barge In” on page 5-79.

3-19

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Paging Listen Addresses

paging group listening

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Description
Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses to send/receive a Real
Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured multicast
addresses without involving SIP signaling.
For more information on this feature, see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-82.

Key Mapping
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Map Redial Key To

map redial key to

Description
Sets the Redial key as a Speeddial key if a value is entered for this parameter. If you
leave this parameter blank, the Redial key returns to its original functionality.
Note:
If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Redial key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain their original functionality. The Redial key on the handset is not configured for speed dial.
For more information on this feature, see “Speeddial Key Mapping” on page 5-84.

Map Conf Key To

map conf key to

Sets the Conf key as a Speeddial key if a value is entered for this parameter. If you
leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality.
Note:
If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Conf key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain their original functionality. The Conf key on the handset is not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Speeddial Key Mapping” on page 5-84.

NA

map redial as dtmf

The “Redial” key remappings has the same behavior as the “Speed Dial” key when the
phone is idle. During an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF
using the phone configured DTMF method (inbound vs out-of-band RFC2833 vs SIP
INFO).
When a user presses the Redial key, the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF
during an active call if the current “map redial key to” parameter is configured to a
number and the “map redial as dtmf” parameter is set to “1”.
For more information on this feature, see “Speeddial Key Mapping” on page 5-84.

NA

Map redial as conf

The “Redial” key remappings has the same behavior as the “Speed Dial” key when the
phone is idle. During an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF
using the phone configured DTMF method (inbound vs out-of-band RFC2833 vs SIP
INFO).
When a user presses the Conf key, the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF during an active call if the current “map conf key to” parameter is configured to a
number and “map conf as dtmf” parameter is set to “1”.
For more information on this feature, see “Speeddial Key Mapping” on page 5-84.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-20

Administrator Level Options
Ring Tones
Parameter in
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Description
Files

Tone Set

Tone Set

tone set

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Ring Tone

For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-87.

Global Ring Tone

ring tone

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
N/A

Globally sets a tone set for a specific country

Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring
tone can be set to one of six distinct rings.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-87.

LineN

lineN ring tone

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.

Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line
basis. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-87.

Priority Alerting Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Enable Priority Alerting

priority alerting enabled

Description
Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming calls and callwaiting calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

Group

alert group

When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the
configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

External

alert external

When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the
configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

Internal

alert internal

When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the
configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

Emergency

alert emergency

When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request,
the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

Priority

alert priority

When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the
configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

3-21

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

Auto Call Distribution

alert auto call distribution

When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

Community 1 through
Community 4

alert community 1
alert community 2
alert community 3
alert community 4

When an "alert community-#” keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request,
the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. Available Bellcore tones
are:
• 0 - Normal ringing (default)
• 1 - Bellcore-dr2
• 2 - Bellcore-dr3
• 3 - Bellcore-dr4
• 4 - Bellcore-dr5
• 5 - Silent
For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-92.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-22

Administrator Level Options
Directed Call Pickup
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Directed Call Pickup

directed call pickup

Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call
Interception)” on page 5-98.

Directed Call Pickup Prefix

directed call pickup prefix

Allows you to specify a prefix to use for "directed call pickup" that you can use with
a BLF or BLF List softkey.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call
Interception)” on page 5-98.

Play a Ring Splash

play a ring splash

Enables or disables the playing of a short "ring splash tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

N/A

prgkeyN ring splash

Controls the ring splash alert pattern per programmable key.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

N/A

softkeyN ring splash

Controls the ring splash alert pattern per softkey.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

N/A

topsoftkeyN ring splash

Controls the ring splash alert pattern per top softkey.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133

N/A

expmodX keyN ring splash

Controls the ring splash alert pattern per expansion module key.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

N/A

ring splash delay

Indicates the delay (seconds) between rings.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

N/A

ring splash volume

Indicates the volume of the ring splash.
For more information on this feature, see “Ring Signal Type for BLF” on page 5-133.

Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Auto Available

acd auto available

Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer.
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for
Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-147.

Auto Available Timer

acd auto available timer

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP phone status switches back to
“available.”
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for
Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-147.

3-23

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Time and Date
Parameter in
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Time Format

Time Format

time format

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Date Format

Date Format

date format

N/A

time zone name

NTP Time Servers

time server disabled

Time Server 1

time server1

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time
Server 1 in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers”
on page 5-24.

Time Server 2

time server2

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Time Server 3

This parameter allows you to enable or disable the Network Time Server (NTP) to set the time on the phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers”
on page 5-24.

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Time Server 2

This parameter allows you to set the time zone code or
customize the time zone for their area as required.

For more information on this feature, see “Time Zone &
Custom Parameters:
DST” on page 5-15.
• time zone minutes
• dst minutes
• dst [start|end] relative date
• dst start month
• dst end month
• dst start week
• dst end week
• dst start day
• dst end day
• dst start hour
• dst end hour

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Time Server 1

This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats.
For more information on this feature, see “Time and
Date” on page 5-15.

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.

Time Servers

This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour
format. Use “0” for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24
hour format.
For more information on this feature, see “Time and
Date” on page 5-15.

Note:
This option can be set by
both Users and Administrators.
Time Zone

Description

This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time
Server 2 in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers”
on page 5-24.

Time Server 3

time server3

This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time
Server 3 in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this feature, see “Time Servers”
on page 5-24.

3-24

Administrator Level Options
Live Dialpad
Parameter in
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Live Dialpad

N/A

live dialpad

Note:
This option can be set by a
User via the IP Phone UI and
by an Administrator via the
IP Phone UI and the configuration files.

Description
This parameter turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or
OFF.
For more information on this feature, see “Live Dialpad”
on page 5-37.

Language
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

N/A

language

The language you want to display for the IP Phone UI.
Valid values are:
• 0 (English) is default
• 1-4
The values 1-4 are dependent on the “language N” parameter. For example, if “language 1: lang_fr.txt”, then “language: 1” would set the IP Phone UI language to
French.
Note:
All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are
dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-38.
For more information on specifying a language to use on the IP Phone, see “Specifying the Screen Language to Use” on page 5-40.

Webpage Language
Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

web language

The language you want to display for the Aastra Web UI.
Valid values are:
• 0 (English) is default
• 1-4
The values 1-4 are dependent on the “language N” parameter. For example, if “language 1: lang_fr.txt”, then “language: 1” would set the webpage language to French.
Note:
All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are
dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-38.

3-25

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameter in Configuration
Files

Description

Input Language

input language

Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and characters in the IP
Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone, in
the language(s) specified.

Note:
This option can be set by both
Users and Administrators.

Valid values are:
• English
• French
• Français
• German
• Deutsch
• Italian
• Italiano
• Spanish
• Español
• Portuguese
• Português
• Russian
• Русский
• Nordic
For more information on this feature, see “Specifying the Input Language to Use” on
page 5-42.

Language 1 thru 4

language N

The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
Valid values are:
• lang_cs.txt (Czech - UTF8)
• lang_cs_op.txt (Czech - ASCII)
• lang_ct.txt (Catalan)
• lang_ct_va.txt (Valencian)
• lang_cy.txt (Welsh)
• lang_de.txt (German)
• lang_da.txt (Danish)
• lang_es.txt (Spanish)
• lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
• lang_fi.txt (Finnish)
• lang_fr.txt (French)
• lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French)
• lang_it.txt (Italian)
• lang_nl.txt (Dutch)
• lang_nl_nl.txt (Dutch - Netherlands)
• lang_no.txt (Norwegian)
• lang_pl.txt (Polish - ASCII)
• lang_pl_pl.txt (Polish - UTF8)
• lang_pt.txt (Portuguese)
• lang_pt_br.txt (Brazillian Portuguese)
• lang_ro.txt (Romanian)
• lang_ru.txt (Russian)
• lang_sk.txt (Slovak - UTF8)
• lang_sk_op.txt (Slovak - ASCII)
• lang_sv.txt(Swedish)
• lang_tr.txt (Turkish)
Notes:
• The languages packs you load are dependant on available language packs from
the configuration server.
• You must reboot the phone to load a language pack.
For more information on this feature, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-38.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-26

Administrator Level Options

Account Configuration
The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and User to configure “do not disturb” and
“call forwarding” by account. You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD. The
three modes you can set on the phone for these features are:
• Account
• Phone
• Custom
You can set the modes for DND and CFWD in the Aastra Web UI at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->General, or using
the following parameters in the configurations files:
• dnd key mode
• call forward key mode
The following table describes the behavior of the mode settings for DND and CFWD.
Modes

DND

CFWD

Account

Sets DND for a specific account. A pre-configured DND
key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to
ON or OFF.

Sets CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a pre-configured CFWD key
applies to the account in focus

Phone

Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A pre-config- Sets the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No
ured DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the conor OFF.
figuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same
configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial
account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.

Custom

Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing
a pre-configured DND key, that list the account(s) on the
phone. The user can select a specific account for DND,
turn DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all
accounts

Sets CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific
mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 3-line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or
ALL Off. On the 8 and 11-line LCD phones, you can set all accounts to All On,
All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other
accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.

References
For more information about account configuration of DND and CFWD on the IP Phones, see Chapter 5, the sections:
For DND:
• “DND Key Mode” on page 5-73.
• “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-154.
For CFWD:
• “Call Forward Mode” on page 5-75.
• “Call Forwarding” on page 5-190.

Network Settings
The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on the IP phone. Network settings are in
two categories:
• Basic network settings
• Advanced network settings
Note:
Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only and are indicated where applicable.

3-27

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Notification When Incorrect Network Settings Entered
If an Administrator enters incorrect network settings over the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI, such as:
• A 0.0.0.0 entered as values for the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway parameters,
• IP Address and Gateway IP address parameter values entered exactly the same,
• Gateway IP address and the IP address parameter values configured not on the same subnet,
the UI will immediately notify the Administrator with a specific message that an incorrect value was entered.

Basic Network Settings
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options manually.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

DHCP

DHCP

dhcp

Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the
required network information. The DHCP server serves the
network information that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone
is unable to get any required information, then you must enter
it manually. DHCP populates the following network information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Domain Name System
(DNS) servers, TFTP, HTTP HTTPS, and FTP servers, and Timer
servers.
Note:
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see “DHCP” on page 4-3.

IP Address

IP Address

ip

IP address of the IP phone. To assign a static IP address, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18.

Subnet Mask

Subnet Mask

subnet mask

Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP
phone. To assign a static subnet mask, disable DHCP.
For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18.

Gateway

Gateway

default gateway

The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP
address. To assign a static Gateway IP address, disable DHCP.
For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18.

Primary DNS

Primary DNS

dns1

Primary DNS server IP address. For any of the IP address settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered
instead of an IP address. With the help of the DNS servers the
domain names for such parameters can then be resolved to
their corresponding IP addresses.
To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Note:
If a host name is configured on the IP phone, you must also set
a DNS.
For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-28

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

Secondary DNS

Secondary DNS

dns2

A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To
assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-18.

Hostname

Hostname

hostname

Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends
with the DHCP Request packet.
For more information, see “Using Option 12 Hostname on the
IP Phone” on page 4-10.

Ethernet

N/A

LAN Port Link

LAN Port

ethernet port 0

PC Port Link

PC Port

ethernet port 1

PC Port Enabled
(3-Line LCD Phones)

PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
(3-Line LCD Phones)

pc port passthrough enabled

Enable
PassThru Port
(8 , 11-Line LCD, and
6739i and 6867i
Phones)

PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
(8 , 11-Line LCD, and 6739i
and 6867i Phones)

3-29

The send (TX) and receive (RX) negotiation to use on the Ethernet LAN Port and Ethernet PC Port for transmitting and
receiving data over the LAN or to/from your PC, respectively.
For more information on configuring the LAN and PC port
negotiation, see “Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation”
on page 4-18.
Note:
The PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP
Phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Advanced Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Description
Files

DHCP User Class

N/A

dhcp userclass

Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends
to the configuration server with the DHCP Request packet.
Note:
If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your
phone for the change to take affect. Any change in its value
during start-up results in an automatic reboot.
For more information, see “Using Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone” on page 4-12.

Download Options

DHCP Download Options

dhcp config option override

The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server. Valid values are:
• -1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP configuration options).
• 0 (Any)
• 43
• 66
• 159
• 160
Notes:
• If the DHCP server supplies Options 159 and 160, the phones
will attempt to contact the configuration server given in
these options.
• You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take
affect.
For more information, see “Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP
Phone” on page 4-13. For more information about setting
DHCP download preference, see “Configuration Server Download Precedence” on page 4-15.

LLDP Support

LLDP

lldp

Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
Caution:
In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is
enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings.
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)” on page 5-77.

N/A

LLDP Packet Interval

lldp interval

The amount of time, in seconds, between the transmission of
LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The value of zero (0) disables
this parameter.
Caution:
In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is
enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings.
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)” on page 5-77.

NAT IP

NAT IP

sip nat ip

IP address the network device that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address
and Port (optional)” on page 4-25.

NAT SIP Port

NAT SIP Port

sip nat port

Port number of the network device that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address
and Port (optional)” on page 4-25.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-30

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

NAT RTP Port

NAT RTP Port

sip nat rtp port

Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This
value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the
gateway or router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for
security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send
RTP data using a different port.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuring NAT Address
and Port (optional)” on page 4-25.

N/A

STUN Server

sip stun ip

IP address of the STUN server (also know as Simple Traversal of
UDP through NAT).
Notes:
1. The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over
the STUN and TURN parameters.
2. STUN does not work if the NAT device is symmetric.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

N/A

STUN Port

sip stun port

Port number of the STUN server (also know as Simple Traversal
of UDP through NAT).
Notes:
1. The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over
the STUN and TURN parameters.
2. STUN does not work if the NAT device is symmetric.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

N/A

TURN Server

sip turn ip

IP address of the TURN server (also known as Traversal Using
Relay NAT).
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over the
STUN and TURN parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

N/A

TURN Port

sip turn port

Port number of the TURN server (also known as Traversal Using
Relay NAT).
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over the
STUN and TURN parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

N/A

TURN User ID

sip turn user

Username that a user must enter when accessing an account
on the TURN server.
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over the
STUN and TURN parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

3-31

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

N/A

TURN Password

sip turn pass

Password that a user must enter when accessing an account on
the TURN server.
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameters take precedence over the
STUN and TURN parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “STUN and TURN Protocols” on page 4-29.

N/A

Rport (RFC 3581)

sip rport

Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP
phone.
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server
send the response back to the source IP address and the port
from which the request came.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “RPORT” on page 4-52.

HTTPS Settings
Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

HTTPS

HTTPS Server - Redirect
HTTP to HTTPS

https redirect http get

Description
Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the
HTTPS server.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-33.

XML HTTP POSTs

HTTPS Server - Block XML
HTTP POSTs

https block http post xml

Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP
POSTs.
Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML
scripts. The phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if
server redirection is enabled, effectively bypassing the secure
connection. When this parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST containing an XML parameter
header results in the following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to
the HTTPS server through use of the “https://” URL.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-33.

Client Method

HTTPS Client Method

https client method

Defines the security method that the client advertises to the
server during the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. TLS is the successor to
SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-33.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-32

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Cert Validation

Validate Certificates

https validate certificates

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the
phone. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them.
Notes:
• If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a
self signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0”
(disabled) before upgrading to Release 2.3 or later of the IP
Phones.
• If you are using HTTPS and the certificates are not valid or
are not signed by Verisign, Thawte, or GeoTrust, Comodo,
Entrust, or CyberTrust, the phones fail to download configuration files.
• Defining this parameter as "0" (disabled) significantly
reduces security for the provisioning process to encryption
only. Validation of the chain-of-trust (i.e. the originator of
the files) will not be performed if this feature is disabled.
Therefore, disabling HTTPS validation of certificates is only
recommended for troubleshooting purposes or when selfsigned certificates are in use.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-36.

Check Expires

Check Certificate Expiration

https validate expires

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of
the certificates. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to
accepting the certificate.
Note:
If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the
clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the
certificates.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-36.

Check Hostnames

Check Certificate Hostnames

https validate hostname

Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the
phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-36.

N/A

Trusted Certificates
Filename

https user certificates

Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in
PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer certificates.
Note:
You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter
in order for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-36.

3-33

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Type of Service (ToS), DSCP
Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Type of Service SIP

SIP

tos sip

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS),
Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-41.

Type of Service RTP

RTP

tos rtp

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS),
Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-41.

Type of Service RTCP

RTCP

tos rtcp

The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Type of Service (ToS),
Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS” on page 4-41.

VLAN
You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under Network Settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Description
Files

VLAN Enable

tagging enabled

Global Settings
VLAN Enable

Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

Other Priority

Priority, Non-IP Packet

priority non-ip

Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

N/A

HPQ Enable

vlan hpq

Enables or disables VLAN High Priority Queue (HPQ) on the IP
phones.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

LAN Port Settings (Port 0)
Phone VLAN ID

VLAN ID

vlan id

Allows you to configure a VLAN ID that associates with the
physical Ethernet Port 0 (LAN port).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority

tos priority map

This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It
is the mapping between the DSCP value and the VLAN priority
value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP packets.
You enter the tos priority map value as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_6
4)
where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 07. Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a
comma, or with values outside the ranges, are ignored.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-34

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

PC Port Settings (Port 1)
PC Port VLAN ID

VLAN ID

vlan id port 1

Allows you to configure a VLAN ID that associates with the
physical Ethernet Port 1 (PC port).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.
Note:
The PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP
Phone.

PC Port Priority

Priority

qos eth port 1 priority

Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets
through to a PC via Port 1.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)”
on page 4-41.

SIP Settings
The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP phone. SIP configuration consists of
configuring:
• Basic SIP Authentication Settings
• Basic SIP Network Settings
• Advanced SIP settings
• RTP Settings
• Autodial Settings
Notes:
• Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also configure specific parameters using
the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present
at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be changed.
• The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account information (i.e., same user name) but
with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance
(SCA), Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.

3-35

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Screen Name

Screen Name

sip screen name
(global)

Name that displays on the idle screen. Valid values are up to
20 alphanumeric characters.

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN screen name (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
N/A

Screen Name 2

sip screen name 2
(global)

Custom text message that displays on the idle screen. Valid
values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

sip lineN screen name 2
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip user name
(global)

User name used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP
phone and for registering the phone at the registrar. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

(Global and Per-Line)

User Name

Phone Number
(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN user name
(per-line)
Display Name

Caller ID

sip display name
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN display name
(per-line)

Auth Name

Authentication Name

sip auth name
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN auth name
(per-line)
Password

Password

sip password
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN password
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
Name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header
field. Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID, and some
may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
Authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. Valid values
are up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
Password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Passwords
are encrypted and display as asterisks when entering.
Note:
The “mask sip password” parameter can be used to mask a
user’s SIP account password in the server.cfg and local.cfg
files (downloaded from the IP phone’s Web UI troubleshooting page for debug purposes).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

N/A

BLA Number

sip bla number
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN bla number
(per-line)

Phone number that you assign to BLA lines that is shared
across all phones (global configuration) or shared on a perline basis (per-line configuration).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
For more information about BLA, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)” on page 5-166.

N/A

Line Mode

sip mode
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN mode
(per-line)
N/A

Call Waiting

call waiting

The mode-type that you assign to the IP phone. Valid values
are Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1), Reserved for (2), or BLA (3).
Default is Generic (0).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
Enable or disables Call Waiting on the IP Phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call Waiting” on
page 5-57.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-36

Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Proxy Server

Proxy Server

sip proxy ip
(global)

IP address of the SIP proxy server. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters.

sip lineN proxy ip
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip proxy port
(global)

SIP proxy server’s port number. Default is 0.

(Global and Per-Line)

Proxy Port

Proxy Port
(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN proxy port
(per-line)
N/A

Backup Proxy Server

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip backup proxy ip
(global)

The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP
phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.

sip lineN backup proxy ip
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip backup proxy port
(global)

The port number of the backup SIP proxy server for which the
IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy port is unavailable.

sip lineN backup proxy port
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip outbound proxy
(global)

Address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if
you have a Session Border Controller in your network, then
you would normally set its address here. Default is 0.0.0.0.

(Global and Per-Line)

N/A

Backup Proxy Port
(Global and Per-Line)

N/A

Outbound Proxy Server
(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN outbound proxy
(per-line)

N/A

Outbound Proxy Port

sip outbound proxy port
(global)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone
sends all SIP messages. Default is 0.

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN outbound proxy port For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.
(per-line)
N/A

N/A

Backup Outbound Proxy
Server

sip backup outbound proxy
(global)

The IP address or domain name of the backup outbound SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP
proxy is unavailable.

(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN backup outbound
proxy
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Backup Outbound
Proxy and Failover Support” on page 4-59.

Backup Outbound Proxy
Port

sip backup outbound proxy
port
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN backup outbound
proxy port
(per-line)
Registrar Server

Registrar Server

sip registrar ip
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN registrar ip
(per-line)

The backup outbound proxy port on the backup outbound
proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Backup Outbound
Proxy and Failover Support” on page 4-59.

IP address of the SIP registrar. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters. Enables or disables the phone to be registered with the
Registrar. When Register is disabled globally, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username and IP address of the
phone. A message "No Service" displays on the idle screen
and the LED is steady ON. If Register is disabled for a single
line, no messages display and LEDs are OFF.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

3-37

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Registrar Port

Registrar Port

sip registrar port
(global)

SIP registrar’s port number. Default is 0.

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN registrar port
(per-line)
N/A

Backup Registrar Server

sip backup registrar ip
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)

N/A

Backup Registrar Port

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP
proxy) for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests
if the primary registrar is unavailable.

sip lineN backup registrar ip
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip backup registrar port
(global)

The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port
number.

sip lineN backup registrar port

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip registration period
(global)

The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.

sip lineN registration period
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-55.

sip centralized conf
(global)

Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for
an IP phone.

sip lineN centralized conf
(per-line)

For more information, see Chapter 4, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-266.

(Global and Per-Line)

N/A

Registration Period
(Global and Per-Line)

N/A

Conference Server URI
(Global and Per-Line)

Advanced SIP Settings
In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following advanced SIP parameters. These parameters may
be configurable via the Aastra Web UI and/or the configuration files.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

Explicit MWI Subscription

sip explicit mwi subscription

If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user
there is a message on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable MWI by setting this parameter to 0 (disable) or 1 (enable) in the configuration files or
by checking the box for this field in the Aastra Web UI. Default is disabled.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Explicit MWI Subscription Period

sip explicit mwi subscription period

The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times
out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

N/A

sip missed call summary subscription
(global)
sip lineN missed call summary subscription
(per-line)

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to
be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially
directed to. Default is disabled.
For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section,
“Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-10.

3-38

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

N/A

sip missed call summary subscription period

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled with
a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit set for
this parameter, it sends the subscription again.
For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section,
“Missed Call Summary Subscription” on page 6-10.

AS-Feature-Event Subscription

sip as-feature-event subscription
(global)

Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND,
CFWD, or ACD features.

sip lineN as-feature-event subscription
(per-line)

For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “AsFeature-Event Subscription” on page 6-11.

sip as-feature-event subscription
period

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, between re-subscribing. If the
phone does not re-subscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it
loses subscription.

(Global and Per-Line)

AS-Feature-Event Subscription
Period

For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “AsFeature-Event Subscription” on page 6-11.
Send MAC Address in REGISTER
Message

sip send mac

Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the
phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone.
For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “TR069 Support” on page 6-4.

Send Line Number in REGISTER
Message

sip send line

Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the
phone to the call server, where the value is the line number that is being
registered.
For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “TR069 Support” on page 6-4.

Session Timer

sip session timer

The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE
requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to
maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
Default is 0.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Timer 1 and Timer 2

sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer

These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is
an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT). Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction
takes to respond to a request.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Transaction Timer

sip transaction timer

The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the call server
(registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the phone
does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this
parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed out.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

3-39

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

Transport Protocol

sip transport protocol

The protocol that the IP phone uses to send out SIP messages.
Notes:
• If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see
if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used, you must specify the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private Key,
and the Trusted Certificates.
• If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, and
the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port

sip local port

Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP
messages.
Notes:
• It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a
UDP transport.
• By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP
SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates
and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP signaling
is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-27.

Local SIP TLS Port

sip local tls port

Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP
messages.
Notes:
• It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being
used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp.
• By default, the IP phones use symmetric TLS signaling for outgoing TLS
SIP messages. When symmetric TLS is enabled, the IP phone uses port
5061 as the persistent TLS connection source port. When symmetric TLS
signaling is disabled, the IP phone chooses a random persistent TLS connection source port for TLS messages from the TCP range (i.e.
49152...65535) after each reboot regardless of whether the parameter
“sip outbound support” is enabled or disabled.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-27.

Registration Failed Retry Timer

sip registration retry timer

Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration
attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Registration Timeout Retry Timer

sip registration timeout retry timer

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it reattempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds, the phone uses a minimum
timer of 30 seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-40

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

Registration Renewal Timer

sip registration renewal timer

The threshold value, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews
registrations. The phone will automatically send registration renewals halfway through the registration period, unless half-way is more than the
threshold value.
For example, if the threshold value is set to 60 seconds and if the registration period is 600 seconds, the renewal REGISTER message will be sent 60
seconds prior to the expiration, as half-way (600/2) > 60. If the registration
period was 100 seconds, then the renewal would be sent at the half-way
point as (100/2) < 60.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

N/A

sip subscription timeout retry timer

Applicable for all event packages, this parameter controls how long the
phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is
responded with a 408 (timeout) or 503 (service unavailable) error code.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

N/A

sip subscription failed retry timer

Applicable for all event packages, this parameter controls how long the
phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is
responded with error codes other than 408 (timeout) or 503 (service
unavailable).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

BLF Subscription Period

sip blf subscription period

The requested duration, in seconds, before the BLF subscription times out.
The phone re-subscribes to the BLF subscription service before the defined
subscription period ends.
Note:
This parameter is not applicable to BLF/List subscriptions.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

ACD Subscription Period

sip acd subscription period

Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone re-subscribes the
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

BLA Subscription Period

sip bla subscription period

Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a
BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone
uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message
received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default
value of 300 seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-69.

Blacklist Duration

sip blacklist duration

Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the
server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed
server (if another server is available) for this amount of time.
For more information about Blacklist Duration, see Chapter 6, the section,
“Blacklist Duration” on page 6-13.

3-41

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

Whitelist Proxy

sip whitelist

This parameter enables/disables the whitelist proxy feature, as follows:
• Set to 0 to disable the feature.
• Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP phone
accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone
rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For more information about Whitelist Proxy see Chapter 6, the section,
“Whitelist Proxy” on page 6-15.

XML SIP Notify

sip xml notify event

Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY
message.
Note:
To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter)
on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a
server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone rejects
the message.
For more information about XML SIP Notify see Chapter 6, the section,
“XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-256.

RTP Settings
You can configure the following RTP settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Description
Files

RTP Port Base

RTP Port

sip rtp port

The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for
security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send
RTP data using a different port. Default is 3000.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

N/A

Force RFC2833 Out of
Band DTMF

sip out-of-band dtmf

Enables or disables out-of-band DTMF. Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to
RFC2833. Valid values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 1 (enabled).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

N/A

DTMF Method

sip dtmf method
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN dtmf method
(per-line)
N/A

RTP Encryption

sip srtp mode
(global)

(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN srtp mode
(per-line)

Sets the dual-tone multi-frequency (DTMF) method to use on
the IP phone on a global or per-line basis. Valid values are 0
(RTP), 1 (SIP INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0 (RTP).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.
This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone,
as follows:
• If set to 0, then disable SRTP.
• If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred.
• If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-42

Administrator Level Options
Codec Preference List
You can configure the following codec preference list settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Description
Files

N/A

Basic Codecs
(G.711 u-Law,
G.711 a-Law, G.729)

sip use basic codecs

Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter
allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets. Valid values are 0 (disabled) and 1
(enabled). Default is 0 (disabled).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

N/A

Customized Codec Prefer- sip customized codec
ence List

Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you
to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

N/A

Packetization Interval

“sip customized codec”
attribute

Packetization interval (ptime) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network bandwidth is used
for transfer of the RTP stream. Enter the ptime values for the
customized Codec list in milliseconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

N/A

Silence Suppression

sip silence suppression

Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones.
The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any
negotiated value.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74.

Autodial Settings
You can configure the following Autodial settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Description
Files

N/A

Autodial Number

sip autodial number

(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN autodial number

Globally or on a per-line basis, specifies the SIP phone number
that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the
phone cradle. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the
phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on
page 4-84.

N/A

Autodial Timeout

sip autodial timeout

(Global and Per-Line)

sip lineN autodial timeout

Globally or on a per-line basis, specifies the time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to dial a pre-configured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle.
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline), the phone immediately
dials a pre-configured number when you lift the handset. If this
parameter is set to a value greater than 0, the phone waits the
specified number of seconds before dialing the pre-configured
number (warmline) when you lift the handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on
page 4-84.

N/A

Use Global Settings
(Per-line configurations
only)

3-43

N/A

For each line, this parameter specifies to use the global autodial
settings of “Autodial Number” and “Autodial Timeout”.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Autodial Settings” on
page 4-84.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

Line Settings
An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line). The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone
model.
IP Phone Model

Available Lines

9143i

9

9480i

9

9480i CT

9

6730i

6

6731i

6

6735i

9

6737i

9

6739i

9

6753i

9

6755i

9

6757i

9

6757i CT

9

6863i

2

6865i

9

6867i

9

On the IP Phones, you can configure the following on a per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI:
• Basic SIP Authentication Settings
• Basic SIP Network Settings
• Advanced SIP Settings (Missed Call Summary Subscription only)
• RTP Settings (DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only)
• Autodial Settings (On a per-line basis, you can also enable/disable the “Use Global Settings” parameter.)

References
For more information about configuring the features listed above on a per-line basis, see Chapter 4, the sections:
• “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-55
• “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-69
• “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-74
• “Autodial Settings” on page 4-84

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-44

Administrator Level Options

Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable keys, or expansion module keys. The
available keys for configuration depend on the IP phone model as shown in the following table.
IP Phone Model

Softkeys

Expansion Module Keys

Programmable Keys

9143i

-

Not Applicable

7

9480i

6

Not Applicable

-

9480i CT

6

Not Applicable

-

6730i

-

Not Applicable

8

6731i

-

Not Applicable

8

6735i

6

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

6

6737i

12

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

-

6739i

55

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

-

6753i

-

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)

6

6755i

6

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

6

6757i

12

36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)

-

6757i CT

12

36 to 108* on Base Station
(Model M670i)
60 to 180** on Base Station
(Model M675i)

-

6863i

-

Not Applicable

3

6865i

-

16 to 48***
(Model M680i)

8

6867i

10

16 to 48***
(Model M680i)

-

*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totalling
108 softkeys. Valid for 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totalling
180 softkeys. Valid for 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
***The M680i expansion module consists of 16 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totalling
48 softkeys. Valid for 6865i and 6867i phones.
The softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key can be set to use a specific function. Available functions
depend on the IP phone model.

3-45

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Reference
For more information about key functions see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Keypad Key/Feature
Key/Expansion Module Key/Hard Key Parameters” on page A-156.
For information about configuring softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion module keys, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-104.

Action URI
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET
when certain XML events occur. The Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should fail.
The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs.
The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following table.
Action URI

Description

Startup

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs.

Successful Registration

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs.

Registration Event

Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when there are registration state changes.
Note:
This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when registration is
already in a timeout state.)

Incoming Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs.

Outgoing Call

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs.

Offhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs.

Onhook

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs.

Connected

Specifies the URI for which the phone executes an HTTP GET when it goes into the “connected” state. This includes regular
phone calls, intercom calls, paging calls, RTP streaming, and the playing of a WAV file. It is also triggered when the phone
establishes the second leg of a 3-way call.

Disconnected

Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state.

XML SIP Notify

Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone.

Poll

Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds.

Poll Interval

Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll".

You can set these parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Reference
For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see “Action URIs” on page 5-246.

XML SIP Notify Events and Action URIs
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with
or without XML content.
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
Reference
For more information about enabling the XML SIP Notify on the IP Phones, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-256.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-46

Administrator Level Options
Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals. An
Administrator can use the action uri poll to command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between polls. Configuration of this feature is
dynamic (no reboot required).
Reference
For more information about configuring the polling and polling interval of Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on
page 5-252.

Configuration Server Settings
The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and software when performing software
upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator can configure the following parameters for the configuration server:
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

download protocol

Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to
the IP phone. Valid values are:
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS

Download Protocol Settings
Download Protocol

Download Protocol

Note:
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or
domain name for the download servers, your DHCP server
must support Option 66. The IP phones also support Option
60 and 43.
For more information, see Chapter 4, the section, “DHCP” on
page 4-3.
For more information about download protocols on the IP
Phone, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on
page 4-87.
Primary TFTP

TFTP Server

tftp server

The TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. If
DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this parameter
to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this configuration file has
been downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Primary TFTP Path

TFTP Path

tftp path

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files
reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located
in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field.
Note:
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

3-47

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Alternate TFTP

Alternate TFTP

alternate tftp server

The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain
name. This will become effective after this configuration file
has been downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Alternate TFTP Path

Alternate TFTP Path

alternate tftp path

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files
reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP
Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located
in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Select TFTP

Use Alternate TFTP

use alternate tftp

Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are
"0" disabled and "1" enabled.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

FTP Server

FTP Server

ftp server

The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will
become effective after this configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a username and password for
access to the FTP server. See the following parameters for
setting username and password.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

FTP Path

FTP Path

ftp path

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files
reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located
in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

FTP Username

FTP Username

ftp username

The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

FTP Password

FTP Password

ftp password

The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-48

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

HTTP Server

HTTP Server

http server

The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after
this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional:
You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server.
See the next parameter (http path).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

HTTP Path

HTTP Path

http path

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files
reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located
in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

HTTP Port

HTTP Port

http port

Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Download Server

HTTPS Server

https server

The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective
after this configuration file has been downloaded into the
phone.
Optional:
You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter (https path).
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Download Path

HTTPS Path

https path

Specifies the path name for which the configuration files
reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located
in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

Download Port

HTTPS Port

https port

Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-87.

3-49

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration
Files

Description

Mode

auto resync mode

Enables and disables the phone to be updated automatically
once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour period. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers.

Auto-Resync Settings
N/A

Notes:
• If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not
informed of an auto-reboot.
• Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone
UI are not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Autoresync affects the configuration files only. However, the
settings in the Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP
phone UI and the configuration files.
• The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
• If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync
check, the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
• The automatic update feature works with both encrypted
and plain text configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-5.
N/A

Time (24-hour)

auto resync time

Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to
be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP,
FTP, and HTTP servers.
Notes:
• The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
• The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
• When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra
Web UI, the values are in 30-minute increments only.
• When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files, the value can be entered using minute values
from 00 to 59 (for example, the auto resync time can be
entered as 02:56).
For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-5.

N/A

Maximum Delay

auto resync max delay

Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits
past the scheduled time before starting a checksync.
For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-5.

N/A

Days

auto resync days

Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between
checksync operations.
Note:
A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the
clock reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to
wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync.
For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-5.

XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)
N/A

XML Push Server List
(Approved IP Addresses)

xml application post list

The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP
phone.
For more information, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML Push
Requests” on page 5-242.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-50

Administrator Level Options

Firmware Update Features
The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download configuration files and upgrade firmware to
the phones from a configuration server.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three ways:
• Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
• Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone automatically looks for firmware updates
and configuration files during the boot process.
• Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware, configuration files, or both at a specific time in
a 24-hour period). (Feature can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).

Reference
For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.”

TLS Support
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol
that ensures communication privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party may
eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the following parameters for TLS Support.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

N/A

Transport Protocol

sip transport protocol

Description
Specifies the protocol that the IP phone uses to send out SIP messages.
Default is UDP.
Notes:
• If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see
if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection. If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then
the phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is used, you must specify
the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, the Private
Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
• If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate, and
the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

N/A

N/A

sips persistent tls

Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that
connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone. If the phones
are set to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call
and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call.
Notes:
• There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone.
• If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also specify
the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

3-51

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

NA

NA

sip persistent tls keep alive

Allows you to configure the keep-alive feature for persistent TLS connections only. When this feature is configured, the phone will send keep-alive
pings to the proxy server at configured intervals.
The keep-alive feature for persistent TLS connections performs the following functionalities:
• After a persistent TLS connection is established or re-established, activate the keep-alive, which will send CRLF to peer periodically.
• The phone will retry the connection automatically when a persistent
TLS connection is down.
• When a persistent TLS connection is re-established (primary is up or
primary is down and backup is up), refresh registration of the accounts
associated with the connection.
• When a persistent TLS connection to primary is down, switch to
backup if connection to backup is working.

NA

NA

sip send sips over tls

Allows administrators the ability to manually configure the IP phones to
use either the SIP or SIPS URI scheme when TLS or persistent TLS is enabled.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

N/A

Root and Intermediate
Certificates Filename

sips root and intermediate
certificates

Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate
and zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order
of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file. If the
local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then
that authority provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note:
The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

N/A

Local Certificate
Filename

sips local certificate

Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses
the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note:
The certificate file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific certificate
files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-52

Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

N/A

Private Key Filename

sips private key

Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the
TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent
TLS.)
Note:
The key file must use the format “.pem”. To create specific private key files
to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

N/A

Trusted Certificates
Filename

sips trusted certificates

Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate files to use when the phone
uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The
phone’s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers
it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting to server A
which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B that has a certificate
signed by CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note:
The certificate files must use the format “.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

3-53

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Administrator Level Options

802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a standard for passing Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) over a wired or wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access, and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS Protocols.
Note:
If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates and private keys must already be configured and stored on
the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates and private keys.
An Administrator can configure the following parameters for the 802.1x Protocol.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI

Parameter in
Aastra Web UI

Parameters in Configuration Files

Description

EAP Type

eap-type

Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone.

General
802.1x Mode

For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.
Identity

Identity

identity

Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
Note:
The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at
the path Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

EAP-MD5 Settings
MD5 Password

MD5 Password

md5 password

Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
Note:
The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at
the path Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5
Password. The password displays as “*******”.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

EAP-TLS Settings
N/A

Root and Intermediate
Certificates Filename

802.1x root and intermediate Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate certificates
certificates
related to the local certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

N/A

Local Certificate
Filename

802.1x local certificate

Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

N/A

Private Key Filename

802.1x private key

Specifies the file name that contains the private key.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

N/A

Trusted Certificates
Filename

802.1x trusted certificates

Specifies the file name that contains the trusted certificates.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-20.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

3-54

Administrator Level Options

Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using this feature, a system administrator can:
• Assign an IP address and IP port to which log information will be transmitted
• Filter the logs according to severity
• Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
• Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
• Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory” and “Maximum Memory Block Size”)
• Enable/disable a WatchDog task
• View Error Messages
• Enable/disable the uploading of configuration and crash file information to a pre-defined server
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform troubleshooting tasks.

Reference
For more information about troubleshooting on the IP Phones, see Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting.”

3-55

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Chapter 4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP) Features
About this Chapter
This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These
features are password protected on the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. This chapter also includes procedures for configuring the Network and Global SIP features via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where
applicable.
Note:
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) procedures in the remainder of this Guide use the keys on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6735i,
6737i, 6739i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, 6863i, 6865i, and/or 6867i, when configuring Administrator Options. For information on using the 9143i, 6730i, 6731i, and 6753i keys to configure the Administrator Options, see Chapter 2, the section,
“Using the Options Key” on page 2-5.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Overview

page 4-2

Network Settings

page 4-3

Basic Network Settings

page 4-3

Advanced Network Settings

page 4-24

Global SIP Settings

page 4-55

Basic SIP Settings

page 4-55

Advanced SIP Settings (optional)

page 4-69

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings

page 4-74

RTCP Summary Reports

page 4-84

Autodial Settings

page 4-84

Configuration Server Protocol
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

page 4-87
page 4-87

4-1

Overview

Overview
An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the phone UI, from the Aastra Web UI, or
the configuration files. Administrator level options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web
UI.
Note:
An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is
configurable using the configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see Appendix A, the section
“Password Settings” on page A-14.
The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP
phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator password. To configure the phone using
the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an administrator username and password.
Note:
In the IP phone UI, the default password is "22222". In the
Aastra Web UI, the default admin username is "Admin" and the default password is "22222".

References
For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix B, “Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.”
For sample configuration files, see Appendix C, “Sample Configuration Files.” These sample files include basic parameters
required to register the IP phone at the PBX.

4-2

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

Network Settings
This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include configuring for:
• DHCP
• IP Address (of phone)
• Subnet Mask (of phone)
• Gateway
• Primary DNS
• Secondary DNS
• Hostname
• LAN Port
• PC Port Pass Thru Enable/Disable
• PC Port

Basic Network Settings
DHCP
The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network administrator a centralized and automated
method of configuring various network parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following
network information:
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway (i.e. router)
• Domain Name System (DNS) Server
• Network Time Protocol Server
• IP Address
• TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone
• TFTP Path or Alternate TFTP Path if enabled on the phone
• FTP Server
• FTP Path
• HTTP Server
• HTTP Path
• HTTP Port
• HTTPS Server
• HTTPS Path
• HTTPS Port
The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server.
The administrator must configure the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by the
DHCP server.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-3

Network Settings
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8.

Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select option DHCP.

6.

Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).

7.

Press Done to save the changes.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

Press DHCP Settings.

6.

In the “Use DHCP?” field, select “Enabled” to enable DHCP.
or
Press “Disabled” to disable DHCP.

7.
8.

Press the
Press the

to return to the previous screen.
button or the

button at any time to return to the idle screen.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.
6.
7.

4-4

In the “Use DHCP?” checkbox, press the

button to enable or disable DHCP.

Press the Save softkey.
Press the

button, the

button, or the Quit softkey to return to the idle screen.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2.

Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).

3.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations
Option 66
The IP Phones support download protocols as referenced in RFC2131 and RFC1541 (TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support
DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration files.
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the servers, your DHCP server must support
Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for forwarding the server’s IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If
your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP address or domain name for your applicable configuration server into your IP phone configuration.
Options 60 and 43
The Aastra phones also support Option 60 and Option 43 as referenced in RFC 2132.
Option 60 (Vendor Class Identifier) provides the DHCP server with a unique identifier for each phone model. This enables
a system administrator to send the phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43.
The table below lists the identifier values for each phone model.
Model

Identifier Value

9143i

AastraIPPhone9143i

9480i

AastraIPPhone9480i

9480i CT

AastraIPPhone9480iCT

6730i

AastraIPPhone6730i

6731i

AastraIPPhone6731i

6735i

AastraIPPhone6735i

6737i

AastraIPPhone6737i

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-5

Network Settings
Model

Identifier Value

6739i

AastraIPPhone6739i

6753i

AastraIPPhone53i

6755i

AastraIPPhone55i

6757i

AastraIPPhone57i

6757i CT

AastraIPPhone57iCT

6863i

AastraIPPhone63i

6865i

AastraIPPhone65i

6867i

AastraIPPhone67i

Option 43 consists of the following sub-options:
Sub-Option/Code

Description

02

Configuration server (protocol, server, and path).

03

Redirection and Configuration Server (RCS) enable/disable.

08

ID string to enable the use of the VLAN identity in sub-option/code 09. Must be specified to avoid conflict with
other vendors.

09

VLAN ID value.

The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a customized Server Configuration in
option 43 (Vendor-Specific information).
Note:
If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43
takes precedence over Option 66.

Using Option 43 to Customize the IP Phone
A System Administrator can customize the IP Phone(s) in the network by entering a text string in the phone’s configuration files. The following is an Option 43 example using Linux.
On the startup of the phones, when the DHCP server receives the request with the information in this example, it allows
the 6757i phones to use FTP and the 6757i CT phones to use TFTP from the same server.

4-6

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Linux Example
A System Administrator can enter the following in the DHCP server:
option space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
option space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;

Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {

class "vendor-class-57i" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name "ftp://username:password@10.10.10.1";
}
class "vendor-class-57iCT" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name "tftp://10.10.10.1";
}
}

Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details.
Protocol

Format

Examples

HTTP

http:///

option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”;

HTTPS

https:///

option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “https://192.168.1.45”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “https://192.168.1.45/path”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “https://httpssvr.example.com/path”;

FTP

ftp://user:password@ftpserver

option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “ftp://192.168.1.45”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “ftp://ftpsvr.example.com”;
(for anonymous user)
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “ftp://userID:password@
ftpsvr.example.com”;

TFTP

tftp://tftpserver

option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “192.168.1.45”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “tftpsvr.example.com”;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name “tftp://tftpsvr.example.com”;

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-7

Network Settings
Option 43 Redirection and Configuration Server (RCS) Bypass
DHCP Option 43 includes the ability to bypass contacting Aastra's Redirection and Configuration Server (RCS), in addition to the previous support of setting the configuration server to contact.
A sub-option code 3 uses a boolean value (true or false) that controls whether or not the phone should contact the RCS
after a factory default. If this value is set to false, the RCS is not contacted. If it is set to true or is missing, then the RCS is
contacted as per previous releases. This can be used in conjunction with the existing code 2 sub-option to set the configuration server.
Configuring RCS Bypass via Option 43 on a Linux DHCP Server
The following example illustrates how to configure RCS bypass via Option 43 on a Linux DHCP server.
option space AastraIPPhone;
option AastraIPPhone.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
option AastraIPPhone.contact-rcs code 03 = boolean;
Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
#The 6757i phones do not contact the RCS but use the defined FTP server for configuration
#files.
class "vendor-class-57i" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone;
option AastraIPPhone.cfg-server-name "ftp://username:password@10.10.10.1";
option AastraIPPhone.contact-rcs false;
}
#The 6757iCT phones do not contact the RCS.
class "vendor-class-57iCT" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone;
option AastraIPPhone.contact-rcs false;

Using Option 120 on the IP Phone
DHCP Option 120 (as referenced in RFC 3361) allows SIP clients to locate a local SIP server (i.e. outbound proxy server)
that can be used for all outbound SIP requests. Using the “use dhcp option 120” configuration parameter, administrators can enable support for DHCP Option 120 on the IP phones. This is particularly useful when service providers require
the IP phones to use certain outbound proxy servers or Session Border Controllers (SBCs) based on geographical location and have provisioned the outbound proxy by using DHCP Option 120. The parameter is disabled by default.
Considerations
The following considerations must be taken into account when enabling support for DHCP Option 120 on the IP phones:
• If the parameter is enabled and DHCP Option 120 contains a valid value, the IP phones will use the server IP/name
obtained via DHCP Option 120 as the outbound proxy for both the Global SIP and Line 1 profiles.
• If Line 2 is configured and the outbound proxy is not defined, the phone will use the outbound proxy located in the
Global SIP profile.

4-8

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
• If Line 2 is configured with a valid outbound proxy, the phone will retain the configured Line 2 outbound proxy and
ignore the Global SIP profile. This allows for Line 2 to be registered to another service with another outbound proxy if
required.
• If Line 2 is configured for another service but no outbound proxy is wanted/required, administrators should not leave
the outbound proxy as undefined (i.e. 0.0.0.0) as the phone will use the outbound proxy located in the Global SIP profile. Instead, administrators should specify the proxy/registrar’s address as the outbound proxy.
• If the parameter is enabled, but the server does not have an outbound proxy configured, DHCP Option 120 is ignored
and the phone will behave as if the parameter is disabled.
• As Option 120 does not support port numbers directly, if a non-standard port (i.e. other than 5060) is required, this
must be set using the configuration parameter “sip outbound proxy port” or by the use of DNS SRV in which case “sip
outbound proxy port” must be set to 0.
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Option 120 Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP Option 120 using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

Using Option 132 (802.1P VLAN ID) and Option 43 to Transfer VLAN ID Assignment Using DHCP
There are now two ways of transporting the VLAN ID parameter in the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP):
• By DHCP Option 43 (vendor specific information)
• By DHCP Option 132 (802.1P VLAN ID)
When the phone receives the VLAN ID from the DHCP and the value is different from the one used by the phone to trigger
the DHCP request, the phone reboots and then sends a new DHCP request in the new VLAN. The phone will remember the
VLAN ID obtained by DHCP options so that on a reboot, the phone will send a DHCP request using the correct VLAN.
If using DHCP Option 43 to transfer VLAN ID assignment the following sub-options are utilized. Additionally, the corresponding rules must be followed:
SubOption/Code
08

Description

Rule

ID string to enable the use of the VLAN identity in Must be the 16-byte character string “Aastra{space}Telecom{space}{space}”
sub-option/code 09. Must be specified to avoid
(i.e. Aastra Telecom followed by two space characters).
conflict with other vendors.
16-byte hex equivalent: 4161737472612054656c65636f6d2020

09

VLAN ID value

Must be 4 bytes, whereas the first and second byte must be 0x00, and the third
and fourth bytes encompass the VLAN ID. The valid range of the VLAN ID is 1 4095.
For example, a VLAN ID of 100 (in dec) is 00 00 00 64 in hex.

Alternatively, administrators can use the “dhcp option 132 vlan id enabled” parameter to enable the VLAN ID assignment transfer using DHCP feature. Option 132 provides the same functionality as Option 43 but the data format of the
VLAN ID value must be 2 bytes, whereas the first and second bytes encompass the VLAN ID (the valid range of the VLAN ID
being 1 - 4095).
Precedence
• LLDP values should have precedence over the DHCP
• DHCP values should have precedence over the configuration files
• DHCP should have precedence over the Local values (configured by the Local MMI of the phone)
• DHCP Option 43 should have precedence over DHCP Option 132

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-9

Network Settings
Configuring Option 43 to Transfer VLAN ID Assignment on a Linux DHCP Server
The following example (covering all the phones) illustrates how to configure Option 43 to transfer VLAN ID assignment
on a Linux DHCP server.
option
option
option
option
option

space AastraIPPhone;
AastraIPPhone.cfg-server-name
AastraIPPhone.contact-rcs
AastraIPPhone.ActivateVLANHeader
AastraIPPhone.VLAN-ID

code
code
code
code

02
03
08
09

=
=
=
=

text;
boolean;
text;
unsigned integer 32;

class "AastraSIP" {
match if ( (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6730i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone9143i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone9480i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone9480iCT")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6730i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6731i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6735i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6737i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone6739i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone53i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone55i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i")
or (option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT")
);
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone;
option AastraIPPhone.cfg-server-name "http://192.168.174.200/aastra";
option AastraIPPhone.contact-rcs
false;
option AastraIPPhone.ActivateVLANHeader "Aastra Telecom ";
option AastraIPPhone.VLAN-ID
100;
} # endClass

#
#
#
#

option
option
option
option

43
43
43
43

Enabling/Disabling DHCP Option 132 VLAN ID Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP Option 132 VLAN ID using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this option to the configuration server. This
option specifies the hostname (name of the client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name
(based on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions.
Notes:
• The hostname of [] automatically populates the field on initial startup of the phone. For
example, for a 6753i, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated as “53i00085D164435”, where the model
number is “6753i” and the MAC address is “00085D164435”.
• If the configuration server sends the hostname back to the phone in a DHCP Reply Packet, the hostname is ignored.
An Administrator can change the “Hostname” for the DHCP Option 12 via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the
Aastra Web UI.

4-10

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Configuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.

2.

Select Network Settings.

3.

Select Hostname.

4.

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example,
53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then press DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required.

5.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.
6.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example,
53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, press the button in the “Hostname” field, and enter a hostname for your phone in the text box that
displays.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required.

7.
8.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.

Press the down navigation key to the Hostname field.

6.

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example,
53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then press the Save softkey.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required.

7.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-11

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2.

By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example,
53i00085D164435).
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if required.

3.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.
Note:
Changing the “Hostname” field requires a reboot of your phone.

4.

Click on Operation->Reset, and click Restart.

Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to the configuration server. This Option 77
defines specific User Class identifiers to convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's
preferences. For example, you can use the User Class option to configure all phones in the Accounting Department with
different user preferences than the phones in the Marketing Department. A DHCP server uses the User Class option to
choose the address pool for which it allocates an address from, and/or to select any other configuration option.
Notes:
• If the User Class is not specified (left blank) in the DHCP request packet, the phone does not send the User Class DHCP
Option 77.
• Multiple User Classes inside a DHCP Option 77 are not supported.
• DHCP Option 77 may affect the precedence of DHCP Options, dependent on the DHCP Server.
An Administrator can configure the DHCP Option 77 User Class via the configuration files and the IP Phone UI.
Configuring DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

4-12

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
1.

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.

2.

Select Network Settings.

3.

Select DHCP Settings.

4.

Select DHCP User Class.

5.

In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.

6.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.

Press the down navigation key to the DHCP User Class field.

6.

In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press the Save softkey.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.

7.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone
In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the phones also support DHCP Options 159
and 160. The IP Phones use the following order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160,
159, 66.
In addition, an administrator can override this order of precedence by setting a configuration parameter called, dhcp config option override (configuration files), DHCP Download Options (Aastra Web UI), or Download Options (IP Phone UI).
Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen DHCP option and ignoring the other options.
For more information about setting DHCP download preference, see “Configuration Server Download Precedence” on
page 4-15.
Note:
Administrators should review the updated IP phone DHCP option precedence order and configuration options to
avoid potential impact to existing Aastra IP phone deployments.
Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option Override on the IP Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.

2.

Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-13

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
3.

Select Network Settings.

4.

Select DHCP Settings.

5.

Select Download Options. The following list displays:
• Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66.
• Option 43
• Option 66
• Option 159
• Option 160
• Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

6.

Choose an option that you want to use to override the DHCP normal precedence order, and press Done.

7.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

Press DHCP Settings.

6.

Press DHCP Download Options.

7.

Select and press the “Option 159” or “Option 160” value.

8.
9.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.

Press the down navigation key to the DHCP Download Options field.

6.

Select one of the following DHCP download options using the left and right navigation keys.
• Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66.
• Option 43
• Option 66
• Option 159
• Option 160
• Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

7.

Press the Save softkey.

8.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

4-14

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2.

In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence order. Valid values are:
• Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160, 159, 66.
• Option 43
• Option 66
• Option 159
• Option 160
• Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

3.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

4.

Click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.

Configuration Server Download Precedence
An Administrator can set the phone’s download precedence to ignore DHCP, (only during the boot when the remote
configuration server is contacted) and use the following precedence instead:
1. Configuration URI,
2. DHCP, and then
3. Direct configuration.

To configure the download precedence, you use the option value (-1) as the value for the “dhcp config option override”
parameter in the configuration files. Setting this parameter to “-1” causes all DHCP configuration options to be ignored.
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to configure the DHCP download precedence using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option Settings” on page A-12.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-15

Network Settings
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.

2.

Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.

3.

Select Network Settings.

4.

Select DHCP Settings.

5.

Select Download Options.
Note:
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))

6.

Select the Disabled option and press Enter.
Note:
The “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options).

7.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

Press DHCP Settings.

6.

Press DHCP Download Options.

7.

Select and press the “Disabled” value.
Note:
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160). This option also performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options).

8.
9.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.

Press the down navigation key to the DHCP Download Options field.

6.

Select the “Disabled” value.
Note:
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160). This option also performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options).

7.

Press the Save softkey.

8.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

4-16

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2.

In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select “Disabled” from the list of options.
Note:
In the Aastra Web UI, the “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration files (ignores DHCP
options).

3.

Click Save Settings to save your setting.

4.

Select Operation->Reset, and click Restart to reboot the phone.

Multiple DHCP Servers
The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers.
After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time period, for more DHCP messages. If the first
DHCP offer contains configuration server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers. If the first DHCP message contains no configuration
server information, the phone continues to listen for other DHCP messages. If the second DHCP message contains configuration server information and other conditions, the phone chooses the second DHCP message over the initial DHCP message.
Note:
If the DHCP Download Options parameter is enabled with a value (Option 43, Option 66, Option 159, or Option 160),
the phone checks the override option setting before timing out.
Warning!
Users currently using multiple DHCP servers on a single network could be affected by this feature.

DNS Caching
The IP phones have the ability to cache DNS requests as referenced in RFC1035 and RFC2181. The phone caches DNS
lookups according to the TTL field, so that the phone only performs another lookup for an address when the TTL expires.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-17

Network Settings
Configuring Network Settings Manually
If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network settings manually:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway
• Primary DNS
• Secondary DNS
Note:
If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-87.
You can configure the network settings using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Errors Messages Display when Incorrect Network Settings Entered
The IP Phone UI AND the Aastra Web UI immediately notify the Administrator if an incorrect value is being entered for
the following network parameters in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI:
• A 0.0.0.0 entered as values for the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway parameters
• IP Address and Gateway IP address parameter values entered exactly the same
• Gateway IP address and the IP address parameter values configured on the same subnet
If you configure the Gateway parameter and the IP Address parameter on the same subnet, the following error message
displays:
“Gateway IP address and the IP address parameter values configured are not on the same subnet”.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone.

6.

Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask.

7.

Select Gateway and enter the gateway address.

8.

Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server.

9.

Press Done to save the changes.
The IP phone is manually configured.

4-18

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
For the 6739i:
Note:
To manually configure DHCP parameters, DHCP must be disabled on the phone.
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

6.
7.

8.

Press IP Address, enter the IP address of your phone in the text box and press
0.0.0.0; for example, 192.168.0.7.
Press the Subnet Mask button, enter the subnet mask address and press
Press Gateway, enter the IP address of your gateway in the text box and press
0.0.0.0; for example, 192.168.0.1.

. The IP Address must be entered in the format

. For example, 255.255.0.0.
. The Gateway must be entered in the format

If required, press the Primary DNS and/or Secondary DNS buttons, enter the IP address of these servers as applicable and press
The IP addresses must be entered in the format 0.0.0.0.
The IP Phone is manually configured.

.

For the 6867i:
Note:
To manually configure DHCP parameters, DHCP must be disabled on the phone.
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Settings.

5.

In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of your phone. The IP Address must be entered in the format 0.0.0.0; for example, 192.168.0.7.

6.

In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet mask address. For example, 255.255.0.0.

7.

In the Gateway field, enter the IP address of your gateway. The Gateway must be entered in the format 0.0.0.0; for example, 192.168.0.1.

8.

If required, enter the Primary DNS and/or Secondary DNS in the respective fields. The IP addresses must be entered in the format 0.0.0.0.

9.

Press the Save softkey.
The IP Phone is manually configured.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-19

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2.

Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field.

3.

Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.

4.

Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field.

5.

Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS field.

6.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.
The IP phone is manually configured.

Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation
Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). You use the LAN Port to connect to a
LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the configuration server (your PC).
There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port. Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select
the type of transmission you want these ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support each of the
following methods of transmission:
• Auto-negotiation
• Half-duplex (10Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000Mbps [if applicable])
• Full-duplex (10Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000Mbps [if applicable])
Note:
The PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission parameters. In the auto-negotiation
process, the connected devices share their speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator (HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different transmission rates (such as
10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec [and 1000Mbit/sec for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737i, 6865i, and 6867i]), different duplex modes
(half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can set the LAN and PC Ports on the IP
phones to auto-negotiate during transmission.

4-20

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Half-Duplex (10Mbps , 100Mbps, or 1000Mbps)
Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier, but not at the
same time. For example, on a LAN using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on the
line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex
transmission implies a bidirectional line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the halfduplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps. Additionally, for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737i, 6865i, and 6867i IP
phones, you can set the half-duplex transmission to transmit in 1000Mbps.
Full-Duplex (10Mbps , 100Mbps or 1000Mbps)
Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier at the same time.
For example, on a LAN with a technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on the line
while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional line (one that can move data in
both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps. Additionally, for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737i, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones, you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in
1000Mbps.
Configuring the LAN Port and PC Port
You can configure the Ethernet port transmission method to use on the IP phones using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Settings” on page A-8.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select Ethernet.

6.

Select LAN Port Link.

7.

Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
Default is AutoNegotiation.

8.

Select PC Port Link.
Note:
PC Port Link parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-21

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
9.

Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
Default is AutoNegotiation.

10.

Press Done (3 times) to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

11.

Select Restart.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

6.

Press Ethernet & VLAN.

7.

Press LAN Port.

8.

Select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
• Auto
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps
Default is Auto.

9.

Press

10.

Press PC Port.

11.

Select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
• Auto
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps
Default is Auto.

12.
13.

4-22

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > Ethernet Ports.

5.

With LAN Port highlighted, press the right navigation key and select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.

6.

Press the left navigation key and press down to highlight PC Port.

7.

Select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• Full 10Mbps
• Full 100Mbps
• Full 1000Mbps
• Half 10Mbps
• Half 100Mbps
• Half 1000Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.

8.

Press the Save softkey.

9.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-23

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.

2.

In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Full Duplex, 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
Default is Auto Negotiation.

3.

In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Full Duplex, 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 1000Mbps (applicable for the 6739i, 6735i, 6737, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones only)
Default is Auto Negotiation.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

Advanced Network Settings
You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address Translation (NAT), Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers, Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration
files.
Note:
The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI are NAT, VLAN, and QoS only.

Network Address Translation (NAT)
The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network Address Translation (NAT). For the IP
Phones, specific configuration parameters allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that
enforces NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant IP phone configuration parameters.

4-24

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

SBC or ALG Proxy/Registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar
has session border control (SBC) or application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone configuration is
required.
Other Proxy/Registrars
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar
is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip" and
"sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and the port used for call signaling messages.
This information is embedded in protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT router
private network.
NAT Router Configuration
You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets containing the various UDP port values to flow
between the private and public networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT router
must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430.

Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
You can also configure a specific NAT address and port on the IP phone using the configuration files, IP Phone UI, or Aastra
Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-25.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-25

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select Static NAT.

6.

Select NAT IP.

7.

Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.

8.

Press Done to save the setting.

9.

Select NAT SIP Port. Default is 51620.

10.

Enter the public SIP signaling port number of your NAT device.

11.

Press Done to save the setting.

12.

Select NAT RTP Port.

13.

Enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.

14.

Press Done (4 times) to finish.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

15.

Select Restart.

For the 6739i:
Note:
NAT is disabled by default. Use this procedure to enable NAT if required.
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.
6.
7.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

Press the NAT Settings button.
Press Static NAT, enter a public IP address of your NAT device, in dotted-decimal format, in the text box, and press

8.

Press NAT SIP Port, and enter the public SIP signaling port number of your NAT device. Default is 51620.

9.

Press NAT RTP Port, and enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.

10.
11.

Press

.

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
Note:
NAT is disabled by default. Use this procedure to enable NAT if required.
1.

4-26

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > NAT.

5.

In the NAT IP field, enter the public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.

6.

In the NAT SIP Port field, enter the public SIP signaling port number of your NAT device. Default is 51620.

7.

In the NAT RTP Port field, enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.

8.

Press the Save softkey.

9.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2.

Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format.
For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device.

3.

Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620.
The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signaling port number of your NAT device.

4.

Enter a NAT port in the "NAT RTP Port" field. Default is 51720.
The “NAT RTP Port” is the RTP Port number of your NAT device.

5.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal
A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default
values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061 for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports are:
• sip local port
• sip local tls port
You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. After configuring these
parameters, you must reboot the phone.
If NAT is disabled, the port number also shows in the VIA and Contact SIP headers.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-27

Network Settings
If you enable NAT, the phone uses the NAT port number (and NAT IP address) in the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP
messages, but still use the configured source port.
Note:
• By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP signaling is disabled,
the phone sends from random ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port. Refer to Symmetric UDP Signaling
on page 6-25 for more information.
• The IP phones also use symmetric TLS signaling for outgoing TLS SIP messages by default. When symmetric TLS is
enabled, the IP phone uses port 5061 as the persistent TLS connection source port. When symmetric TLS signaling is
disabled, the IP phone chooses a random persistent TLS connection source port for TLS messages from the TCP range
(i.e. 49152...65535) after each reboot regardless of whether the parameter “sip outbound support” is enabled or disabled. Refer to Symmetric TLS Signaling on page 6-25 for more information.
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT traversal:
• sip local port
• sip local tls port
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
• “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-26.
• “Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-27.

4-28

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2.

The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060. Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than
65535.
Note:
It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport.

3.

The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note:
It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on
443/tcp.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

STUN and TURN Protocols
The IP phones support the following audio-path NAT Traversal features:
• Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through Network Address Translation (NAT) or also known as
STUN (RFC 3489)
and
• Traversal Using Relay NAT or also known as TURN

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-29

Network Settings
STUN is a protocol that allows the IP phones on a network to discover the presence and types of NATs and firewalls
between them and the public Internet. It also provides the ability for the phones to determine the public IP addresses
allocated to them by the NAT. STUN works with many existing NATs, and does not require any special behavior from
them. As a result, it allows the phones to work through existing NAT infrastructures.
TURN is a protocol that governs the reception of data over a connection by a single communications device operating
behind a NAT or firewall. A TURN server relays packets from an external IP address towards the IP phone only if that
phone has previously sent a packet through the same TURN server to that particular external IP address.
SIP NAT IP configurations takes precedence over the STUN/TURN configurations. Typically, the STUN/TURN configuration
is only used for media (RTP traffic) - not for signaling. (For signaling, you need to enable “Rport” if the NAT device does
not recognize SIP. For more information about “Rport”, see the section, “RPORT” on page 4-52 of this release note.
The STUN/TURN configuration applies globally on the phone. If you configure both STUN and TURN on the phone, it discovers what type of NAT device is between the phone and the public network. If the NAT device is full cone, restricted
cone, or port restricted cone, the phone uses STUN. If the NAT device is symmetric, the phone uses TURN.
If you configure STUN only, the phone uses STUN without the NAT discovery process.
Note:
STUN does not work if the NAT device is symmetric.
If you configure NAT only, the phone uses NAT and does not perform the NAT discovery process during startup. TURN is
compatible with all types of NAT devices.
Limitations to Using STUN and TURN
• The Firewall type discovery process on the phone is limited to 20 seconds. If the discovery process fails, the STUN
server may not be configured correctly.
• When making a new phone call, the phone limits obtaining the port from the STUN/TURN server to 5 seconds. If the
call does not go through in 5 seconds, the phone makes the call using the Session Description Protocol (SDP) with a
local IP:port.
An Administrator can configure a STUN and/or TURN server on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Configuring STUN and TURN Servers Using the Configuration Files
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameter takes precedence over the STUN and TURN parameters.
Use the following parameters to configure STUN and TURN servers in your network.
• sip stun ip
• sip stun port
• sip turn ip
• sip turn port
• sip turn user
• sip turn pass
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
• “SIP STUN Parameters” on page A-27
• “SIP TURN Parameters” on page A-28.

4-30

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Configuring STUN and TURN Servers Using the Aastra Web UI
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameter takes precedence over the STUN and TURN parameters.
Use the following procedure to configure STUN and TURN servers in your network using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

Configure STUN on the IP Phone
2.

In the “STUN Server” field, enter the IP address and/or qualified domain name of the STUN server in your network. You can enter up to 2 values separated by a comma. The first value is the primary and the second value is the backup. For example:
10.50.103.12, stunbackup.aastra.com.
The STUN configuration is only used for media (RTP traffic) that goes through the server - not for signaling. (For signaling, you need to enable
Rport if the NAT device does not recognized SIP).
The STUN configuration applies globally to each phone.
If you configure both STUN and TURN on the phone, it discovers what type of NAT device is between the phone and the public network. If
the NAT device is full cone, restricted cone, or port restricted cone, the phone uses STUN. If the NAT device is symmetric, the phone uses
TURN. If you configure STUN only, the phone uses STUN without the NAT discovery process.
Notes:
• The NAT IP configuration parameter takes precedence over the STUN parameters.
• STUN does not work if the NAT device is symmetric.

3.

In the “STUN Port” field, enter the port number of the STUN server. You can enter up to 2 values separated by a comma. The first value is the
primary and the second value is the backup. For example:
3478,3479
Default is 3478. Range of values are 0 to 65535.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Configure TURN on the IP Phone

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-31

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
5.

In the “TURN Server” field, enter the IP address and/or qualified domain name of the TURN server in your network. You can enter up to 2 values separated by a comma. The first value is the primary and the second value is the backup. For example:
10.50.103.12, turnbackup.aastra.com.
The TURN configuration is only used for media (RTP traffic) that goes through the server - not for signaling. (For signaling, you need to enable
Rport if the NAT device does not recognized SIP).
The TURN configuration applies globally to each phone.
If you configure both STUN and TURN on the phone, it discovers what type of NAT device is between the phone and the public network. If
the NAT device is full cone, restricted cone, or port restricted cone, the phone uses STUN. If the NAT device is symmetric, the phone uses
TURN. If you configure TURN only, the phone uses TURN with the NAT discovery process. TURN is compatible with all types of NAT devices
but can be costly since all traffic goes through a media relay (which can be slow, can exchange more messages, and requires the TURN server
to allocate bandwidth for calls).
Note:
The NAT IP configuration parameter takes precedence over the STUN and TURN parameters.

6.

In the “TURN Port” field, enter the port number of the TURN server. You can enter up to 2 values separated by a comma. The first value is the
primary and the second value is the backup. For example:
3479,3480
Default is 3479. Range of values are 0 to 65535.

7.

(Optional) In the “TURN User ID” field, enter the username that a user must enter when accessing an account on the TURN server. For example, 0412919146.
Valid values are up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

8.

(Optional) In the “TURN Password” field, enter the password that a user must enter when accessing an account on the TURN server. For
example, 42447208233b8b8b8a234.
Valid values are up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

9.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) Support
The phones now support the Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) Protocol. ICE makes use of the Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN) protocol and its extension, Traversal Using Relay NAT (TURN).
In an ICE environment, two agent endpoints (or two phones communicating at different locations) are able to communicate via the SIP Protocol by exchanging Session Description Protocol (SDP) messages. At the beginning of the ICE process, the agents are ignorant of their own topologies. In particular, they might or might not be behind a NAT (or multiple
tiers of NATs).
ICE allows the agents to discover enough information about their topologies to potentially find one or more paths by
which they can communicate.
The ICE Protocol is automatically enabled if both STUN and TURN servers are configured in the network. The following
occurs when ICE is used on the phone:
• The TURN address/port is always used as the preferred media address in initial INVITES.
• Media is sent through the TURN server prior to the completion of the ICE connectivity check.
• A Re-INVITE is used to adjust media (if required) after the ICE connectivity check is complete.
• When ICE is enabled, call hold is performed via the send only attribute instead of changing the media address to
0.0.0.0.
• The ICE Protocol supports the RTCP SDP attribute (RFC 3605)
STUN and TURN can be enabled using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. This automatically enables ICE.

4-32

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Reference
To configure STUN and TURN (which automatically enables ICE), see “Configuring STUN and TURN Servers Using the Configuration Files” on page 4-30 and “Configuring STUN and TURN Servers Using the Aastra Web UI” on page 4-31.

HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as the pages that are returned by the Web
server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet. It
uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for
commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the
Internet. When a server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note:
HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP/IP lower layer.
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
• Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
• Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a softkey definition.
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set
of tasks. The main HTTPS server functions are:
• Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
• Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection.
Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
• Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3)
• Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
• HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for the IP phones.
Note:
To enable or disable the IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring
the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-87.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client and Server Settings” on page A-30.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-33

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Configuration Server.

5.

Select HTTPS Settings.

Configure HTTPS Client
6.

Select HTTPS Client.

7.

Select Client Method.

8.

Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
• SSL 3.0 (default)
• TLS 1.0

9.

Press Done to save the changes.

Configure HTTPS Server
10.

Select HTTPS Server.

11.

Select HTTP->HTTPS.

12.

Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.

13.

Press Done to save the changes.

14.

Select XML HTTP POSTs.

15.

Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.

16.

Press Done (4 times) to finish.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

17.

4-34

Select Restart.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
For 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Cfg. Svr.

5.

Press HTTPS.

Configure HTTPS Client
6.

Press HTTPS Client Method.

7.

Press a client method value to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
• SSL 3.0 (default)
• TLS 1.0

8.

Press Done to save the changes.

Configure HTTPS Server
9.

Press HTTPS Server.

10.

Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server in the text box. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.

11.
12.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Configuration Server.

5.

In the Download Protocol field, select HTTPS.

Configure HTTPS Client
6.

In the HTTPS Client Method field, press a client method value to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
• SSL 3.0 (default)
• TLS 1.0

Configure HTTPS Server
7.

In the HTTPS Server field, enter the IP address of the HTTPS server in the text box. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to
HTTPS.

8.

Press the Save softkey.

9.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-35

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings.

2.

Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are:
• SSL 3.0 (default)
• TSL 1.0

3.

Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking
the check box). Default is disabled.

4.

Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server - Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled.

5.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates. This feature supports the following:
• Verisign, GeoTrust, Thawte, Comodo, Entrust, and CyberTrust signed certificates
• User-provided certificates
• Checking of hostnames
• SSL Wildcard certificate (i.e. SSL certificate specifying the Common Name as a wildcard [e.g. CN=*.company.com]) support.
• Checking of certificate expiration
• Ability to disable any or all of the validation steps
• Phone displays a message when a certificate is rejected (except on check-sync operations)
All validation options are enabled by default.
Note:
The IP Phones do not support the transmission of HTTPS client certificates for validation by HTTPS servers. If the IP
Phone attempts to download files from an HTTPS server that requires a client certificate during a file download transaction, a “No Certificate” error will occur and be logged on the IP Phone (viewable under the Options->Phone Status
->Error Messages menu in the IP Phone UI or on the Troubleshooting page of the respective IP Phone’s Web UI).
Certificate Management
Aastra Provided Certificates
The phones come with root certificates from Verisign, GeoTrust, Thawte, Comodo, Entrust, and CyberTrust pre-loaded.
User Provided Certificates

4-36

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
The administrator has the option to upload their own certificates onto the phone. The phone downloads these certificates
in a file of .PEM format during boot time after configuration downloads. The user-provided certificates are saved on the
phone between firmware upgrades but are deleted during a factory default. The download of the user-provided certificates are based on a filename specified in the configuration parameter, https user certificates (Trusted Certificates
Filename in the Aastra Web UI; user-provided certificates are not configurable via the IP Phone UI).
Note:
Certificates that are signed by providers other than Verisign, GeoTrust or Thawte do not verify on the phone by default.
The user can overcome this by adding the root certificate of their certificate provider to the use-provided certificate
.PEM file.
Certificate Validation
Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the certificates are well formed and signed
by one of the certificates in the trusted certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally, compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected.
If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected. Certificate validation is controlled by three parameters
which you can configure via the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI:
• https validate certificates - Enables/disables validation.
• https validate hostname - Enables/disables the checking of the certificate commonName against the server name.
• https validate expires - Enables/disables the checking of the expiration date on the certificate.
User Interface
Certificate Rejection
When the phone rejects a certificate, it displays, "Bad Certificate" on the LCD.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-37

Network Settings
For Verisign Certificate Rejection
The phones support 2048-bit Verisign certificates. In case of a certificate error, detailed descriptions can be found from
the error message list in the phone status menu.
The following error descriptions are now available:
• No Certificate
• Bad Certificate
• Unsupported Certificate
• Certificate Revoked
• Certificate Expired
• Certificate Unknown
Configuring HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
An Administrator can configure HTTPS Server Certificate Validation using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the
Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS server certificate validation on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings” on page A-31.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.

2.

Select Configuration Server.

3.

Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation.
The following list displays:
• Enable
• Check Expires
• Check Hostnames

Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
4.

Select Enable.

5.

Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Note:
If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must set this field to “No” before upgrading to
Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.

6.

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note:
This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
7.

Select Check Expires.

8.

Press Change to toggle the “Check Expires” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Notes:
• This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
• If the “Check Expires” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates.

4-38

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
9.

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note:
This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname
10.

Select Check Hostnames.

11.

Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”.

12.

Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note:
This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.

13.

Press

to exit the Options Menu and return to the idle screen.

For 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Cfg. Svr.

5.

Press HTTPS.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
6.
7.

Press Cert. Validation, and select Enable.
Press

to scroll to the next screen.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
8.

Press Check Expires, and select Enable.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname
9.
10.
11.

Press Check Hostnames, and select Enable.
Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Configuration Server.

5.

In the Download Protocol field, select HTTPS.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-39

Network Settings
6.

In the Cert. Validation checkbox, press the

button to enable the feature.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
7.

In the Check Expires checkbox, press the

button to enable the feature.

Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname
8.

In the Check Hostnames checkbox, press the

9.

Press the Save softkey.

10.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

button to enable the feature.

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings.

HTTPS Validation
Certificate
Parameters

2.

The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click the check mark in the box to clear the
check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them.
Notes:
• This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
• If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you must disable (uncheck) this field before
upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.

3.

The “Check Certificate Expiration” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificate expiration, click the check mark in the box
to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate.
Notes:
• This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
• If the “Check Certificates Expiration” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates.

4.

The “Check Certificate Hostnames” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of hostnames, click the check mark in the box to clear
the check mark.
Note:
This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.

4-40

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
5.

If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file name in the format  in the
“Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example:
trustedCerts.pem
This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in
PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer certificates.
Notes:
• You must disable the “Validate Certificates” field in order for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates.
• This parameter requires you restart the phone in order for it to take affect.

6.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

7.

If you entered a filename in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes
to take affect.

Virtual LAN (optional)
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send
outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a
VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of adding and removing tags, and processing
the ID and priority information contained within the tag.
Note:
All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1.
VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP phones.

Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic of the different QoSs.
QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This service differentiation is noticeable during
periods of network congestion (for example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of network
performance.
Port 0 is the Ethernet LAN Port connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet PC Port used for passthrough to a PC.
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic receive preferential handling over other
traffic classes.
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is applied to a packet.
The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and DiffServ QoS for VLAN:
Parameters in Configuration Files

Parameters in Aastra Web UI

Global
tagging enabled

VLAN Enable

priority non-ip

Priority, Non-IP Packet

vlan hpq

HPQ Enable

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-41

Network Settings
Parameters in Configuration Files

Parameters in Aastra Web UI

LAN Port
vlan id

VLAN ID

tos priority map

SIP Priority

tos priority map

RTP Priority

tos priority map

RTCP Priority

PC Port
vlan id port 1

VLAN ID

QoS eth port 1 priority

Priority

Notes:
• In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone
reboots if you modify the "tagging enabled" (VLAN Enable in the Web UI), "vlan id", or "vlan id port 1" parameters.
• Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID (vlan id) to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID (vlan id port 1) to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow
frames from the PC Port (containing a VLAN ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN Port and frames
from the LAN Port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC
Port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on
page 4-45. For configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local Area
Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-34.
• Alternatively setting the LAN Port VLAN ID (vlan id) to any ID from 1 to 4094 and PC Port VLAN ID (vlan id port 1) to
4095 will allow frames from the LAN Port (containing a VLAN ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the PC
Port and frames from the PC Port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the LAN Port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN
(optional)” on page 4-45. For configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-34.
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping
DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp", and "tos rtcp" parameters.
When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1, VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to
the DSCP value instead of a single priority for all packets. An administrator can also configure VLAN priority for non-IP
packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter.
Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 26, 46, and 46 respectively, this results in corresponding default
VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 5 for RTP, and 5 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping” on page 4-42).
You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just the VLAN priority values, or by modifying
all values.

4-42

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN priority mapping:
DSCP Range

VLAN Priority

0-7

0

8-15

1

16-23

2

24-31

3

32-39

4

40-47

5

48-55

6

56-63

7

The following table identifies the default DSCP values for the protocols:
Protocol Name

Default DSCP Values in the ToS Field

sip

26

rtp

46

rtcp

46

Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone.
Note:
ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively. Use the
following procedures to change these settings if required.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-39.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select Type of Service DSCP.

6.

Select Type of Service SIP.
or
Select Type of Service RTP.
or
Select Type of Service RTCP.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-43

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
7.

Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46.
Valid values are 0 to 63.
Note:
If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting
as shown in the first table in “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping” on page 4-42 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN
(optional)” on page 4-45.

8.

Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

9.

Select Restart.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

6.

Press Type of Service DSCP.

7.

Press Type of Service SIP, and then enter a value for ToS. Default is 26.

8.

Press Type of Service RTP, and then enter a value for ToS. Default is 46.

9.

Press Type of Service RTCP, and then enter a value for ToS. Default is 46.

10.
11.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > DSCP.

5.

Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46.
Valid values are 0 to 63.
Note:
If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting
as shown in the first table in “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping” on page 4-42 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN
(optional)” on page 4-45.

4-44

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
6.

Press the Save softkey.

7.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service DSCP.

2.

Select a Protocol field:
• “SIP”
or
• “RTP”
or
• “RTCP”

3.

Enter a value from 0 to 63. Default values are as follows:
• SIP = 26
• RTP = 46
• RTCP = 46
Note:
If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting
as shown in the first table in “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping” on page 4-42. For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN
(optional)” on page 4-45.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

Configuring VLAN (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone.
Notes:
• VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter.
You can change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
• PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-34.

IP Phone UI
1.
2.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Select Admin Menu.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-45

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Network Settings.

5.

Select Ethernet and VLAN.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
6.

Select VLAN Settings.

7.

Select VLAN.

8.

Select Enable.

9.

Press Done or Set to save the changes.

10.

Select LAN Port VLAN.

11.

Select Other Priority and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.

12.

Press Done (2 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.

To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
13.

Select LAN Port VLAN.

14.

Select LAN Port VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port.
Default is 1.
Note:
Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN port and frames from the LAN port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 4095
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 3

15.

Press Enter or Set to save the change.

16.

Select VLAN Priority.

17.

Select one of the following VLAN Protocols:
• SIP Priority
• RTP Priority
• RTCP Priority

18.

Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol. Default values for each Protocol are:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5

19.

Press Done (2 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.

To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):
20.

Select PC Port VLAN.
Note:
PC Port parameters are not applicable to the 6730i IP Phone.

4-46

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
21.

Select PC Port VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the PC Port.
Default is 4095.
Note:
Setting the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the LAN port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the PC port and frames from the PC port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the LAN port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094.
The following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095

22.

Press Enter or Set to save the change.

23.

Select PC Port Priority.

24.

Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port.
Default is 0.

25.

Press Done to save the changes.

26.

Navigate back to the Options List menu.

27.

Select Restart Phone and follow the prompts to restart the phone and apply the configuration changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-47

Network Settings
For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Network.

5.
6.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

Press Ethernet & VLAN.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
7.

Press VLAN Settings.

8.

Press the VLAN Disable/Enable button, and then press Enable.

9.

Select LAN Port VLAN.

10.

Select Other Priority and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.

11.

Press

to return to the VLAN screen.

To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
12.

Press LAN Port VLAN.

13.

Press LAN Port VLAN ID and then enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 1.
Note:
Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN port and frames from the LAN port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 4095
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 3

14.

Press SIP Priority and then enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the SIP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 3.

15.

Press RTP Priority and then enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 5.

16.

Press RTCP Priority and then enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTCP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 5.

17.

Press

to return to the VLAN screen.

To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):
18.

4-48

Press PC Port VLAN.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
19.

Press PC Port VLAN ID and then enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 4095.
Note:
Setting the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the LAN port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the PC port and frames from the PC port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured
VLAN ID before being forwarded to the LAN port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095

20.
21.
22.

Press Priority and then enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the PC Port VLAN priority. Default is 0.
Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Network > VLAN.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
5.

In the Basic Settings > VLAN field enable VLAN by pressing the right navigation key.

6.

In the LAN Port VLAN > Other Priority field, change the non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.

To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
7.

In the LAN Port VLAN > LAN Port VLAN ID field, enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 1.
Note:
Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN port and frames from the LAN port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 4095
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 3

8.

In the LAN Port VLAN > SIP Priority field, enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the SIP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 3.

9.

In the LAN Port VLAN > RTP Priority field, enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 5.

10.

In the LAN Port VLAN > RTCP Priority field, enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTCP priority for the LAN Port. Default is 5.

To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-49

Network Settings

IP Phone UI
11.

In the PC Port VLAN > PC Port VLAN ID field, enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 4095.
Note:
Setting the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the LAN port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the PC port and frames from the PC port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured
VLAN ID before being forwarded to the LAN port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN: Enable
VLAN Settings->LAN Port VLAN->LAN Port VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095

12.

In the PC Port VLAN > Priority field, enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the PC Port VLAN priority. Default is 0.

13.

Press the Save softkey.

14.

Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN.

To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
2.

Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box).

3.

With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.

4.

Enable or disable VLAN HPQ by checking or unchecking the HPQ Enable field check box.

4-50

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
To set VLAN ID and priority for the LAN Port (Port 0):
5.

Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
Note:
Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN port and frames from the LAN port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged.

6.

Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for the associated Protocol. Valid values are
0 to 7, Defaults are as follows:
• SIP Priority = 3
• RTP Priority = 5
• RTCP Priority = 5

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-51

Network Settings

Aastra Web UI
To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1):
7.

Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 4095.
Note:
Setting the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the LAN port (containing a VLAN
ID) to be untagged before being forwarded to the PC port and frames from the PC port (without a VLAN ID) to be tagged with the configured
VLAN ID before being forwarded to the LAN port.
Example:
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the LAN Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094. The
following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged.

8.

Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port in the Priority field. Default is 0.

9.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.

RPORT
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used with UDP, responses to requests are returned
to the source address from which the request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of
the request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) or
firewall.
A parameter created for the “Via” header called “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came.
When you enable “Rport, the phone always uses symmetric signaling (listens on the port used for sending requests.)
Note:
Configuring the Rport parameter is recommended for clients behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall
since this parameter allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the
port from which the request came.
An Administrator can configure “Rport” using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

4-52

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Network Settings
Configuring Rport Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to configure Rport on your phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Rport Setting” on page A-26.

Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.

2.

In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking
the box).
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the
request came.

3.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Network Time Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize the phone clock time with a computer
(configuration server) in the network.
To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can specify up to three time servers
in your network.
Note:
The IP phones support NTP version 1.
Configuring NTP Servers (optional)
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server Settings” on page A-45.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-53

Network Settings
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Preferences.

3.

Select Time and Date.

4.

Select Timer Server 1, Timer Server 2, or Time Server 3.

5.

Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server.

6.

Press Done to save the change.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

1.

Press Set Time.

2.

Press Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, or Time Server 3.

3.

Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server.

4.

Press

to return to the idle screen.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Time and Date > Set Date and Time.

3.

In the Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3 fields, enter the respective IP address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain
name.

4.

Press the Save softkey.

Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.

2.

Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.

3.

Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or "Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location
of the NTP time server.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

4-54

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Global SIP Settings
Description
The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings to register at the IP PBX.
The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all
SIP lines are necessarily hosted using the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters can
also be defined for network and user account.
You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the
Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP
phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only.
On the IP Phones, you can configure Basic and Advanced SIP Settings. The Basic SIP Settings include authentication and
network settings. The Advanced SIP Settings include other features you can configure on the IP Phone.

Reference
For more information about Basic SIP Settings (for authentication and network), see “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-55.
For more information about Advanced SIP Settings, see “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-69.

Basic SIP Settings
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also configure specific parameters using the IP
Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be changed.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged
Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and network parameters on the IP phones.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-55

Global SIP Settings
SIP Global Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
Call Waiting (see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features”)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Backup Outbound Proxy
Backup Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

SIP Global Authentication Parameters
• Screen Name
•
•
•
•

User Name
Display Name
Authentication Name
Password

sip screen name
sip screen name 2
sip user name
sip display name
sip auth name
sip password
sip bla number
sip mode
call waiting (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
• sip vmail

SIP Global Network Parameters
• Proxy Server
• Proxy Port

• Registrar Server
• Registrar Port

sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
sip backup proxy ip
sip backup proxy port
sip outbound proxy
sip outbound proxy port
sip backup outbound proxy
sip backup outbound proxy port
sip registrar ip
sip registrar port
sip backup registrar ip
sip backup registrar port
sip registration period
sip centralized conf (see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features”)

Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro
and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-266.

4-56

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
SIP Per-Line Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters

Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
Call Waiting (see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features”

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Backup Outbound Proxy Server
Backup Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters
• Screen Name
•
•
•
•

User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password

sip lineN screen name
sip lineN screen name 2
sip lineN user name
sip lineN display name
sip lineN auth name
sip lineN password
sip lineN bla number
sip lineN mode
sip lineN call waiting
(see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
• sip lineN vmail

SIP Per-Line Network Parameters
• Proxy Server
• Proxy Port

• Registrar Server
• Registrar Port

sip lineN proxy ip
sip lineN proxy port
sip lineN backup proxy ip
sip lineN backup proxy port
sip lineN outbound proxy
sip lineN outbound proxy port
sip lineN backup outbound proxy
sip lineN backup outbound proxy port
sip lineN registrar ip
sip lineN registrar port
sip lineN backup registrar ip
sip lineN backup registrar port
sip lineN registration period
sip lineN centralized conf (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro
and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-266.
Note:
The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable using the configuration files only. To configure
voicemail see Chapter 5, the section, “Voicemail” on page 5-235.
Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent conflicting parameter values from being
applied, per-line values always take precedence over the corresponding set of global values.
For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all parameters from that set are applied and all
parameters from the corresponding global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are
not defined in the per-line set.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-57

Global SIP Settings
SIP Password Masking
The “mask sip password” configuration parameter can be used to mask a user’s SIP account password in the server.cfg
and local.cfg files (downloaded from the IP phone’s Web UI troubleshooting page for debug purposes). The parameter is
disabled by default.
Configuring SIP Password Masking
Use the following procedure to configure SIP password masking using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-61.

SIP Precedence Example
The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for storage and parsing of the SIP configuration
parameters.
The following SIP configuration is assumed:
# SIP network block
sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37
sip registrar port: 4020
sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com
sip line3 proxy port: 0

Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone uses those parameter values for SIP calls
made on that line. However, because those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any
of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the
phone ignores all global network block parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone
does not use a registrar for that line.
Note:
Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a per-line configuration. Per-line settings are configurable
for lines 1 through 7.

Backup Proxy/Registrar Support
The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If the primary server is unavailable, the
phone automatically switches to the backup server allowing the user's phone to remain in service.
How it Works
All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is unavailable, then a new registration
request is sent to the backup registrar. This also applies to registration renewal messages, which try the primary server
before the backup.
Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the primary proxy is tried before the backup.
You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

4-58

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
SIP Outbound Support
The IP Phones support draft-ietf-sip-outbound-15. That specification describes how a SIP User Agent (UA) behind a firewall, reuses an existing connection (usually the REGISTER outbound connection) for the inbound request if the proxy supports it. The UA uses keep-alive packets to monitor the connection status.
An Administrator can enable or disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration files:
• sip outbound support
Note:
If the Global SIP parameter “Persistent TLS” is set on the phone, then only one TLS persistent connection can be established since the phone uses the local port 5061 for connection. If the Global SIP parameter “TLS” is set on the phone,
more than one connection can be setup since the phone uses a random local port for connection.

Enabling/Disabling SIP Outbound Draft 15 Support
Use the following procedure to enable/disable SIP outbound Draft 15 support.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Outbound Support” on page A-60.

Backup Outbound Proxy and Failover Support
The IP phones support a backup outbound proxy and failover. This feature provides the following:
• The ability to specify a backup outbound proxy.
• The ability to support SIP outbound on all connection types.
• The ability to configure the SIP outbound keep alive timer.
• The ability to reestablish failed outbound connections in the background.
• The ability to support the DNS Cache Time-to-Live (TTL) requirements
Using this feature depends on the SIP network settings on your phone. The following table identifies network configuration scenarios, and the method by which this specific feature works in each scenario.
IF

THEN

SIP Outbound Disabled and
backup proxy and backup registrar
configured,

• All invite, register, and subscribe requests attempt to use the primary proxy/registrar
first
• If the primary registrar fails, the phone registers to the backup proxy.
• If the backup proxy fails, the phone registers using the Address of Record (AOR) of the
backup proxy, and moves all subscriptions to the backup proxy.
• When the primary registrar comes back online, the phone registers to it using the currently active AOR.
• When the primary proxy comes back online the phone registers with the primary AOR
to the currently active registrar and moves all subscriptions to the primary proxy.

backup proxy, backup registrar, and backup outbound
proxy configured,

• All invite, register, and subscribe requests attempt to use the primary proxy/registrar
first.
• If any connection fails, the phone registers the backup AOR on the backup registrar. It
moves all subscriptions to the backup proxy.
• When the primary is functional again, registration and subscriptions are moved back to
the primary proxy/registrar.

backup outbound proxy configured only,

• All invite, register and subscribe requests are sent through the primary outbound
proxy first.
• If the primary proxy fails, the phone performs registration and subscriptions through
the backup outbound proxy.
• When the primary proxy comes back online, the registrations and subscriptions are
performed again through the primary outbound proxy.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-59

Global SIP Settings
SIP Outbound Enabled and
backup proxy and backup registrar configured,

• Establishes flow to the primary proxy and registrar.
• If the flow to the primary registrar fails, the phone:
– establishes flow to the backup registrar.
– registers to the backup registrar.
– attempts to reestablish flow to the primary registrar in the background.
– When the primary registrar comes back up, the phone unregisters from the backup
and registers with the primary.
• If the flow to the primary proxy fails, the phone:
– establishes flow to the backup proxy.
– registers the new AOR with the active registrar.
– moves subscriptions to the backup proxy.
– attempts to reestablish the flow to the primary proxy in the background.
• When the flow to the primary proxy is reestablished, the phone:
– registers the primary AOR to the active registrar.
– moves subscriptions to the primary proxy.
– unregisters/unsubscribes from the backup proxy/registrar.

backup proxy, backup registrar, and backup outbound
proxy configured,

• Establishes a flow to the primary outbound proxy.
• If the flow fails, the phone:
– establishes the flow to the backup proxy.
– registers the backup AOR to the backup registrar.
– moves subscriptions to the backup proxy.
– attempts to reestablish connection to the primary outbound proxy in the background.
• When the flow to the primary proxy is reestablished, the phone:
– registers the primary AOR to the primary registrar.
– moves the subscriptions to the primary proxy.
– unregisters/unsubscribes from the backup proxy/registrar.

Note:
This configuration assumes that the outbound proxy is
maintaining its own outbound connections to the
proxy/registrar.

backup outbound proxy configured only,

• Establishes a flow to the primary outbound proxy.
• If the flow fails, the phone:
– establishes the flow to the backup proxy.
– registers the backup AOR to the backup registrar.
– moves subscriptions to the backup proxy.

Configuring a Backup Outbound Proxy
To configure this feature an Administrator can set the following parameters in the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI:
Parameter

Aastra Web UI Configuration

Configuration File Configuration

sip outbound support

-

✔

sip symmetric udp signaling

-

✔

sip transport protocol

✔

✔

sip backup outbound proxy

✔

✔

sip backup outbound proxy port

✔

✔

sip lineN backup outbound proxy

✔

✔

sip lineN backup outbound proxy port

✔

✔

Global Parameters

Per-Line Parameters

Note:
The “sip outbound support”, “sip symmetric udp signaling”, and “sip transport protocol” parameters are existing
parameters on the phone. For more information about these parameters, see Appendix A “SIP Outbound Support”,
“Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting”, and “Advanced SIP Settings”.

4-60

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
Use the following procedure to configure backup outbound proxies.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backup Outbound Proxy (Global Settings)” on page A68 and “Backup Outbound Proxy (Per-line Settings)” on page A-77.

Limitations
The following are limitations with this feature:
• Keep-alive mechanisms shall be limited to IPv4 only.
• Per M5T, RFC5686 is not fully supported although the draft upon which it was based (draft-ietf-sip-outbound-15) is supported.

SIP Server (SRV) Lookup
The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to issue a DNS query to retrieve records pertaining to a
SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy.
The IP phone issues a DNS query for an SRV record when the IP address of the server is FQDN and the corresponding port
is 0.
Note:
The phones only generate a ‘request’ and do not facilitate the ‘DNS or SRV service or provide a response to the requests.
For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com", and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup
may return multiple servers, based on the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary.
However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is non-zero, then the phone issues a DNS "A"
Name Query to resolve the FQDN into dot notation form.
If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port 5060 is used.
You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg) only. The parameters to use are:
• sip proxy ip
• sip proxy port

Contact Header Matching
When sending SIP packets, the IP Phones observe the Contact header by matching the username, domain name, port, and
transport as referenced in SIP RFC 3261.This is called “strict SIP Contact header matching.” However, in specific networks
(such as behind some SOHO routers), the phone registers with its private address in the Contact, but when the response is
sent back, the router maintains the public side IP address in the Contact header. This causes a non-matching Contact
header and the phone does not accept the new registration expiry timer.
You can set the parameter, “sip contact matching”, which allows the Administrator to specify the method used by the
phone to match the Contact Header. Previously by default, when sending SIP packets, the IP phones observed the contact
header by doing a full URI matching of username, domain, phone IP and port name, and transport (value=’0’). Now the
default value for the “sip contact matching” parameter is to match the username only (value=’2’). This parameter is available via the configuration files only.
Enabling/Disabling the “Contact Header Matching” Feature
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the “Contact Header Matching” feature.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Contact Header Matching” on page A-60.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-61

Global SIP Settings
Configuring Basic SIP Authentication Settings
You can configure SIP authentication settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note:
To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-61 or “SIP Basic, PerLine Settings” on page A-69. For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for call waiting, see the section, “Call Waiting Settings” on
page A-64 or “SIP Per-Line Call Waiting Setting” on page A-73.

Reference
For more information about setting the call waiting parameters, see Chapter 5, the section, “Call Waiting” on page 5-57.
Call Waiting cannot be set via the IP Phone UI.
Note:
You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select SIP Settings.

5.

Select User Name to enter the username that appears in the name field of the SIP URI. This user name is also used for registering the phone
at the registrar.
Note:
The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.

6.

Press Done to save the changes.

7.

Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header field.

8.

Press Done to save the changes.

9.

Select Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen.

10.

Press Done to save the changes.

11.

Select Authentication Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.

12.

Press Done to save the changes.

13.

Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note:
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

14.

Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

15.

4-62

Select Restart.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

IP Phone UI
For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Advanced. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press SIP.

5.

Press User Name and enter the username that appears in the name field of the SIP URI. This user name is also used for registering the phone
at the registrar.
Note:
The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.

6.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

7.

Press Display Name and enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header.

8.

Press Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen.

9.

Press Auth. Name and enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER
request.

10.

Press Password and enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note:
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

11.
12.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select SIP > User.

5.

In the User Name field, enter the username that appears in the name field of the SIP URI. This user name is also used for registering the
phone at the registrar.
Note:
The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.

6.

In the Display Name field, enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header.

7.

In the Screen Name field, enter the name to display on the idle screen.

8.

In the Auth. Name field, enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER
request.

9.

In the Password field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note:
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

10.

Press the Save softkey.

11.

Restart the phone for the changes to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-63

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.

Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9)->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.

Configure SIP authentication settings:
2.

In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen.

3.

In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen Name” on the idle screen.
Notes:
• If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
• Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
• If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display.

4.

In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.

5.

In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.

6.

In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization header of the SIP REGISTER request.

7.

In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note:
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.

8.

In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all IP phones.
For more information about setting the BLA on the phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)” on page 5-166.

9.

In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks network.

4-64

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Configure Global Call Waiting
10.

The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable call waiting on a global basis, uncheck this box.
For more information about setting the call waiting parameters, see Chapter 5, the section, “Call Waiting” on page 5-57.

Configure Per-Line Call Waiting
11.

The "Call Waiting" field is set to “Global” by default. To enable call waiting for a specific line, select “enabled” from the list in this field. To disable call waiting for a specific line, select “disabled” from the list in this field.
For more information about setting the call waiting parameters, see Chapter 5, the section, “Call Waiting” on page 5-57.

12.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional)
You can configure SIP network settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note:
To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-61 or “SIP Basic, PerLine Settings” on page A-69.

Note:
You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select SIP Settings.

Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
5.

Select Proxy IP/Port.

6.

Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.

7.

Enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Default is 0.

8.

Press Done to save the changes.

Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
9.

Select Registrar IP/Port.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-65

Global SIP Settings

IP Phone UI
10.

Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e., line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.

11.

Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server.
Default is 0.

12.

Press Done to save the changes.

Enabling/Disabling the Use of the Registrar Server
13.

Select SIP Register.

14.

Press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). Default is “Yes”.
This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network.

15.

Press Done to save the changes.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

16.

Select Restart.

For the 6739i:
Note:
You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced button. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press the SIP button.

Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
5.

Press Proxy Server and enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.

6.

Press Proxy Port and enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server. For example, 5060. Default is 0.

Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
7.

Press Registrar Server and enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.

8.
9.
10.

4-66

Press Registrar Port and enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server. For example, 5060.
Default is 0.
Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
For the 6867i:
Note:
You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select SIP > Call Server.

Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
5.

In the Proxy Server field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.

6.

In the Proxy Port field, enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server. For example, 5060. Default is 0.

Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
7.

In the Registrar Server, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.

8.

In the Registrar Port field, enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server. For example, 5060.
Default is 0.

9.

Press the Save softkey.

10.

Restart the phone for the changes to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-67

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network Settings.

Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9)->Basic SIP Network Settings.

2.

In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server.

3.

In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.

4.

In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup proxy server.

5.

In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server.

6.

In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully qualified domain name. This parameter allows
all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server.
Note:
If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP
phone uses the global configuration for all lines except
line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line.

7.

4-68

In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be sent to the outbound proxy server.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
8.

In the "Backup Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the backup SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully qualified domain name.

9.

In the "Backup Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be sent to the backup outbound
proxy server.

10.

In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables
registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e., line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.

11.

In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar.

12.

In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup registrar server. A global value of
0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e., line 1, line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.

13.

In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar.

14.

In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.

15.

To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-266.

16.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features on the phone. The following table provides
a list of Advanced SIP Settings that you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

Explicit MWI Subscription
Explicit MWI Subscription Period

sip explicit mwi subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription period

MWI for BLA Account

sip mwi for bla account (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

Missed Call Summary Subscription (global)
Missed Call Summary Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip missed call summary subscription (global)
sip lineN missed call summary subscription (per-line) (see Chapter 6,
“Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

Missed Call Summary Subscription Period
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip missed call summary subscription period
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

AS-Feature-Event Subscription (global)
AS-Feature-Event Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip as-feature-event subscription (global)
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

AS-Feature Event Subscription Period (see Chapter 6, “Configuring
Advanced Operational Features”)

sip as-feature-event subscription period
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip send mac (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

Send Line Number in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip send line (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

Session Timer

sip session timer

T1 Timer
T2 Timer

sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer

Transaction Timer

sip transaction timer

Transport Protocol

sip transport protocol

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-69

Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

Local SIP UDP/TCP Port (see page 4-27)

sip local port (see page 4-27)

Local SIP TLS Port (see page 4-27)

sip local tls port (see page 4-27)

Registration Failed Retry Timer

sip registration retry timer

Registration Timeout Retry Timer

sip registration timeout retry timer

Registration Renewal Timer

sip registration renewal timer

N/A

sip subscription timeout retry timer

N/A

sip subscription failed retry timer

BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”)

Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Fea- sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational
tures”)
Features”)
Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

sip whitelist (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”)

The “sip subscription timeout retry timer” and “sip subscription failed retry timer” are only configurable through
the configuration files. The “sip subscription timeout retry timer” parameter can be used to control how long the
phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is responded with a 408 (timeout) or 503 (service
unavailable) error code. The “sip subscription failed retry timer” parameter can be used to control how long the phone
delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is responded with error codes other than 408 or 503.
If any one of the above parameters are configured with a valid setting, the default retry times for all event packages will
be overwritten with the new setting. If the parameters are not configured or contains a invalid setting, the default retry
timers for all event packages will be retained. Both parameters are disabled by default.
Reference
Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-82 for a description of each of the above parameters.
For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational
Features.”

Configuring Advanced SIP Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-82.

4-70

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.

2.

Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N.

3.

Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells
the user there is a message on the IP Phone.

4.

If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period” field, enter the requested duration, in
seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400.

5.

Enable the “MWI for BLA Account” to enable or disable a BLA configured line to send an MWI SUBSCRIBE message for the BLA account.
Notes:
• If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect.
• Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for
BLA to occur.
• The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
• Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying MWI does not change.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-71

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
6.

Enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-11.
Note:
The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.

7.

If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of
time, in seconds, between re-subscribing. If the phone does not re-subscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription.
Default is 3600.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription” on page 6-11.

8.

Enable the “Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message” and the “Send Line Number in REGISTER Message” fields by checking the check
boxes.
(Disable these fields by unchecking the check boxes. Default is disabled for both fields).
For more information about these message features, see Chapter 6, the section, “TR-069 Support” on page 6-4.
Note:
The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” feature is configurable on a global basis only

9.

In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The
proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.

10.

In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone session. These timers are SIP transaction layer
timers defined in RFC 3261.
Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request. Default is 4 seconds.

11.

In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the call server (registrar/proxy) to respond
to SIP messages that it sends.
Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
Note:
If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter, the phone assumes the message has timed
out.

12.

In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), UDP, TCP, Transport Layer Security (TLS) or Persistent TLS. The
value “UDP” is the default. For more information about TLS, see “RTP Encryption” on page 4-79 and Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer
Security (TLS)” on page 6-16.

13.

In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone receives SIP messages. Default is 5060.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-27.

14.

In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5061.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-27.

15.

In the "Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration attempts
when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800.

16.

In the "Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits until it re-attempts to register
after a REGISTER message times out.
Valid values are 30 to 2147483647. Default is 120.

4-72

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
17.

In the "Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the threshold value, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews registrations.
The phone will automatically send registration renewals half-way through the registration period, unless half-way is more than the threshold
value.
For example, if the threshold value is set to 60 seconds and if the registration period is 600 seconds, the renewal REGISTER message will be
sent 60 seconds prior to the expiration, as half-way (600/2) > 60. If the registration period was 100 seconds, then the renewal would be sent
at the half-way point as (100/2) < 60.
Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 15.

18.

The “BLF Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds.
This feature sets the duration, in seconds, before the BLF subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to the BLF subscription service
before the defined subscription period ends.
Note:
This parameter is not applicable to BLF/List subscriptions.
For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,“BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-137.

19.

(For Sylantro Servers) The “ACD Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone re-subscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade
or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “ACD Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section, “ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-150.

20.

The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds.
This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero
(0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the
phone uses the default value of 300 seconds.
For information about setting the “BLA Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section, “BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-170.

21.

(For Broadsoft Servers) The “Blacklist Duration” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds (5 minutes). Valid values are 0 to
9999999.
This feature specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP
message to a failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time.
Note:
The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
For information about setting the “Blacklist Duration”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration” on page 6-13.

22.

In the “Park Pickup Config” field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Notes:
• For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-182.
• Leave the park/pickup configuration field blank to disable the park and pickup feature.

23.

Enable the "Whitelist Proxy" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from
an untrusted proxy server.
For information about setting the “Whitelist Proxy”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on page 6-15.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-73

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
24.

Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).

Enabling this parameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note:
To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the
phone rejects the message.
For information about setting this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-256.
25.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets sent over the IP network. Information in
the RTP header tells the receiver how to reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e.
which codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints to monitor packet delivery, detect
and compensate for any packet loss in the network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for
the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer encapsulation protocol.
Note:
If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the same port as the RTP voice packets. The phones support
decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds
You can set the following parameters for RTP on the IP Phones:
Aastra Web UI Parameters

Configuration File Parameters

RTP Port

sip rtp port

Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)

sip use basic codecs

AMR and AMR-WB (G.722.2) Codecs (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i,
6863i, 6865i, 6867i only)

sip amr codec payload format
sip amr codec mode set
sip amr wb codec mode set

Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF

sip out-of-band dtmf

Customized Codec Preference List

sip customized codec

DTMF Method (global and per-line settings)

sip dtmf method (global and per-line settings)

RTP Encryption (global and per-line settings)

sip srtp mode (global and per-line settings)

Silence Suppression

sip silence suppression

RTP Port
RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally an even-numbered port, and the RTCP
control is on the next port up. A phone call therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream.
The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for each subsequent line available within
the phone to provided each line a unique RTP port for its own use.
On the IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP port allocation can be configured using "RTP
Port Base". The default RTP base port on the IP phones is 3000.

4-74

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002, 5003, etc.
You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.

Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of instructions that together implement one or more
algorithms. In the case of IP telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to decrease the
content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio.
With smaller file sizes and lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content over a network more easily.
Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) transmission standards for the following
CODECs:
• Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or u-Law companding
• Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited linear prediction (CS_ACELP)
All codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression for each codec,
based on a minimum packet size.
Default Codec Settings
Packetization Time

Silence Suppression

PCM

30 ms

enabled

64 Kb/s

PCM

30 ms

enabled

8 Kb/s

CS-ACELP

30 ms

enabled

CODEC

Bit Rate

Algorithm

G.711 a-law

64 Kb/s

G.711 u-law
G.729a

You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic" codec set, which consists of the set of codecs and packet sizes shown
above;
or
you can configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using the defaults (see “Customized Codec Preference
List” below).
Note:
The basic and custom codec parameters apply to all calls, and are configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

AMR and AMR-WB (G722.2) Codecs (Licensed Feature for 6735i , 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i Only)
Administrators can configure Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) and Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband (AMR -WB) codecs on the
6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones. AMR/AMR-WB codecs provide improved speech quality during calls due to
wider speech bandwidth, and cover both real-time transfers through Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) and non-real-time
transfers through stored files. AMR supports eight narrowband speech encoding modes (0-7) with bit-rates ranging from
4.75 to 12.2 kilobits per second (kbps). AMR-WB supports nine wideband speech encoding modes (0-8), with bit-rates
ranging from 6.60 to 23.85 kbps.
Note:
AMR/AMR-WB codecs is a licensed feature on the SIP IP phones. To confirm that the license is active, Administrators can
view the license through the phone's Web UI on the Licensing Status page. AMR/AMR-WB should be listed if the feature is available to be used. If Administrators configure AMR/AMR-WB when there is no license, the codec will be
ignored and not negotiated.
Administrators can configure AMR/AMR-WB on the IP phones in the Customized Codec Preference List on the Web UI or
in the configuration files using the existing “sip customized codec” parameter.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-75

Global SIP Settings
Optional parameters have also been created to configure this feature. Administrators can enable the feature by using the
“sip amr codec payload format”, which specifies the payload format for AMR/AMR-WB. AMR/AMR-WB can operate in
either bandwidth-efficient mode (0) or in octet-aligned mode (1), depending on the value configured. Administrators
can also disable the octet-align mode and still send the octet-align:0 header in the Session Description Protocol (SDP) by
using value (2) for the parameter. By default, the IP phones utilize bandwidth-efficient mode.
Administrators can also specify the list of mode sets that the IP phones support and state the preferred mode to use if
multiple modes are supported by both sides, using the “sip amr codec mode set” and/or the “sip amr wb codec mode
set” parameters. If no modes are defined then all codec modes are allowed for the payload type.
The following tables list the AMR/AMR-WB codec modes and corresponding bit-rates.
AMR Codec Modes
AMR Mode

Bit-Rate (kbps)

0

4.75

1

5.15

2

5.90

3

6.70

4

7.40

5

7.95

6

10.2

7

12.2

AMR-WB (G.722.2) Codec Modes
AMR-WB Mode

Bit-Rate (kbps)

0

6.60

1

8.85

2

12.65

3

14.25

4

15.85

5

18.25

6

19.85

7

23.05

8

23.85

4-76

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
Customized Codec Preference List
You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred codecs. To do this, you must enter the payload value (payload), the
packetization time in milliseconds (ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp).
Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried within the RTP packets to the end user at the
destination. The default payload setting is to allow all codecs. You can set payload to use only basic codecs (G.711 u-Law,
G.711 a-Law, G.729), and/or Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) and Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband (AMR -WB) (G.722.2) codecs (for
the 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i IP phones if a license is available), or select from up to 14 codecs for the phones
AND customize a codec preference list of up to 10 codecs. In the Aastra Web UI, codecs 2 through 10 can be set to “None”
if required (no codecs).
Note:
In the Aastra Web UI:
• Setting Codec 1 to “All” ignores the packetization interval (ptime). The packetization interval setting defaults to 30,
which is the default for all codecs.
• Setting Codec 1 to “All” automatically sets all other codec preference fields 2 through 10 to “None”.
• Setting Codec 1 to “Basic” and all other codec preferences in 2 through 10 to “None”, forces the phone to use only the
basic codecs as in previous releases (G.711 u-law, G.711 a-law, and G.729). If you select an additional codec to use in
the codec preferences 2 through 10 fields, those codecs are added to the list of Basic codecs for the phone to use.
Ptime (packetization time) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within each RTP packet sent to the destination,
and hence defines how much network bandwidth is used for transfer of the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values for the
customized codec list in milliseconds. (See table below).
Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network bandwidth, by avoiding the transmission of RTP packets for any frame where no voice energy was detected by the VAD.
You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following example:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off

The valid values for creating a codec preference list are as follows (in numerical order of payload).

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-77

Global SIP Settings
Customized Codec Settings
Attribute

Value

payload

Configuration Files

Web UI

0 - G711u/8000
8 - G711a/8000
9 - G722/8000
18 - G729/8000
96 - G726-40/8000
97 - G726-24/8000
98 - G726-16/8000
106 - BV16/8000
107 - BV32/16000
110 - G711u/16000
111 - G711a/16000
112 - L16/8000
113 - L16/16000
115 - G726-32/8000
118 - AMR G.722.2
119 - AMR-WB G.722.2

G.711u (8K)
G.711a (8K)
G.722
G.729
G.726-40
G.726-24
G.726-16
BV16 (8K)
BV32 (16K)
G711u (16K)
G711a (16K)
L16 (8K)
L16 (16K)
G.726-32
AMR (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, 6867i only)
AMR-WB (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, 6867i only)

Leave blank for all codecs

All (Codec 1 only)
Basic (Codec 1 only)
None (Codecs 2 thru 10 only)

Codec 1
Codec 2
.
.
.
.
.
Codec 10
(in Web UI)

ptime (in milliseconds)

5, 10, 15, 20.......90

Packetization Interval
(in Web UI)
silsupp

on
off

Silence Suppression
(in Web UI)

If the customized codec preference list is configured as “All”, the phone will set the codec order of preference as per the
following table:
Preference

Payload

Codec

1

0

G711u/8000

2

18

G729/8000

3

106

BV16/8000

4

107

BV32/16000

5

113

BV32/16000

6

110

G711u/16000

7

111

G711a/16000

8

112

L16/8000

9

98

G726-16/8000

10

97

G726-24/8000

11

115

G726-32/8000

12

96

G726-40/8000

13

9

G722/8000

14

8

G711a/8000

4-78

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
15

118

AMR (G.722.2) (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i,
6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)

16

119

AMR-WB (G.722.2) (Licensed feature for 6735i,
6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)

You can specify a customized codec preference list on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Out-of-Band DTMF and DTMF Method
The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode as referenced in RFC2833. In the Aastra Web
UI, you can enable or disable this feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default. In out-of-band mode,
the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets. You can configure outof-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
An additional feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone uses to send DTMF digits
from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP INFO, or
both. You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
The matrix below details DTMF behavior when the out-of-band DTMF and DTMF method settings are configured in various scenarios:
Web UI Setting/Configuration Parameter Setting

DTMF Behavior

DTMF Method/
sip dtmf method

Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF/
SIP INFO
sip out-of-band dtmf

In-Band DTMF

Out-of-Band DTMF
(RFC2833)

RTP (0)

Disabled (0)

No

Yes

No

RTP (0)

Enabled (1)

No

No

Yes

SIP INFO (1)

Disabled (0)

Yes

No

No

SIP INFO (1)

Enabled (1)

Yes

No

Yes

RTP and SIP INFO (2)

Disabled (0)

Yes

Yes

No

RTP and SIP INFO (2)

Enabled (1)

Yes

No

Yes

RTP Encryption
The IP Phones include support for Secure Real-time Transfer Protocol (SRTP), using Session Description Protocol Security
(SDES) key negotiation, for encryption and authentication of RTP/RTCP messages sent and received by the Aastra IP
phones on your network.
As administrator, you specify the global SRTP setting for all lines on the IP phone. You can choose among three levels of
SRTP encryption, as follows:
• SRTP Disabled (default): IP phone generates and receives non-secured RTP calls. If the IP phone gets called from SRTP
enabled phone, it ignores SRTP tries to answer the call using RTP. If the receiving phone has SRTP only enabled, the call
fails; however, if it has SRTP preferred enabled, it will accept RTP call.
• SRTP Preferred: IP phone generates RTP secured calls, and accepts both secured and non-secured RTP calls. If the
receiving phone is not SRTP enabled, it sends non-secured RTP calls instead.
• SRTP Only: IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only; all other calls are rejected (fail).
You can override the global setting as necessary, configuring SRTP support on a per-line basis. This allows IP phone users
to have both secured and unsecured lines operating on the same phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-79

Global SIP Settings
When an active call is using SRTP (i.e. when an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call and the receiving phone is also SRTP
enabled) and the transport protocol is set to TLS, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure.
If one of the phones does not support SRTP and/or TLS is not enabled, the IP Phone UIs do not display the lock icon, indicating that the call may not be secure.
Note:
If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable Transport Layer Security (TLS). This prevents capture of the key used for
SRTP encryption. To enable TLS, set the Transport Protocol parameter (located on the Global SIP Settings menu) to
TLS.
You can configure SRTP on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Silence Suppression
In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending voice over a packet-switched system.
Silence suppression is encoding that starts and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth.
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.
You can configure silence suppression on a global-basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Option to Include/Remove Silence Suppression Attribute from SDP Offer
The parameter sip remove silence suppression offer is available allowing administrators the ability to control whether
or not the silence suppression attribute should be included in the Session Description Protocol (SDP) offer.
If enabled (1), the silence suppression attribute will be removed from the SDP offer. If disabled (0), the attribute will not
be removed from the SDP offer. This parameter is disabled by default and requires a reboot if the value of the parameter
has changed. You can configure this parameter using the configuration files only.

Configuring RTP Features
Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on
page A-99.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select SIP Settings.

5.

Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.

6.

Press Done (2 times) to save the change.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings

7.

4-80

Select Restart.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

IP Phone UI
For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced button. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press the SIP button.

5.
6.
7.
8.

Press

to scroll to the next screen.

Press RTP Port Base and enter an RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.
Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select SIP > Call Server.

5.

In the RTP Port Base field, enter an RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.

6.

Press the Save softkey.

7.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-81

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
Global Settings.

Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->RTP Settings.
Per-Line Settings.

2.

Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000.
The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the
gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports
for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port.
Note:
The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds

3.

The "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the box.
Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.

4.

Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both. Default is RTP.
Note:
You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis.

5.

Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP
Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled.
Note:
You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis.

4-82

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
6.

In the Codec Preference List, select a codec (with its payload type) you want the phones to use. Valid values are:
• All
• Basic (G.711 u-law, G.711 a-law, G.729)
• G722
• G711u/8K
• G711u/16K
• G711a/8K
• G711a/16K
• G729
• G726-16
• G726-24
• G726-32
• G726-40
• BV16 (8K)
• BV32 (16K)
• L16 (8K)
• L16 (16K)
• AMR (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)
• AMR-WB (G.722.2) (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)
Notes:
• Setting Codec 1 to “All” ignores the packetization interval (ptime). The packetization interval setting defaults to 30, which is the default for
all codecs.
• Setting Codec 1 to “All” automatically sets all other codec preference fields 2 through 10 to “None”.
• Setting Codec 1 to “Basic” and all other codec preferences in 2 through 10 to “None”, forces the phone to use only the basic codecs as in
previous releases (G.711 u-law, G.711 a-law, and G.729). If you select an additional codec to use in the codec preferences 2 through 10
fields, those codecs are added to the list of Basic codecs for the phone to use.

7.

(Optional) In Codec 2 through Codec 10, select a preference of codecs (with its payload type) to use on the phone. Valid values are:
• None
• G722
• G711u/8K
• G711u/16K
• G711a/8K
• G711a/16K
• G729
• G726-16
• G726-24
• G726-32
• G726-40
• BV16 (8K)
• BV32 (16K)
• L16 (8K)
• L16 (16K)
• AMR (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)
• AMR-WB (G.722.2) (Licensed feature for 6735i, 6737i, 6863i, 6865i, and 6867i only)
Note:
You can select up to 9 codecs in addition to the codec you selected in step 6.

8.

In the “Packetization Interval” field, select the time, in milliseconds. Valid values are 5 to 90, in increments of 5 milliseconds.

9.

The “Silence Suppression” field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the check box.
When enabled, the phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.

10.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-83

Global SIP Settings

RTCP Summary Reports
The IP phones include the capability of enabling/disabling the generation of RTCP summary reports using the SIP vqrtcpxr event package. These RTCP summary reports include voice quality statistics according to draft-ietf-sipping-rtcpsummary-05 specifications including packet loss, jitter, and delay statistics, as well as call quality scores. When this feature is enabled, an RTCP summary report is sent at the end of each call via a PUBLISH message to the configuration
server.
In addition to enabling/disabling the generation of these reports, you must specify the hostname and port of the entity,
known as the collector, receiving the reports. Similar to the other IP Phone SIP account parameters, the RTCP summary
report parameters can be set on a global or a per-line basis using the configuration files only.
The RTCP summary report parameters are:
• sip rtcp summary reports
• sip LineN rtcp summary reports
• sip rtcp summary report collector
• sip LineN rtcp summary report collector
• sip rtcp summary report collector port
• sip LineN rtcp summary report collector port
Note:
The transport protocol used for RTCP summary reports is also configurable. Refer to Configurable Transport Protocol
for SIP Services and RTCP Summary Reports on page 6-40 for more information.

Limitations
The following is a limitation when enabling RTCP summary reports on the phone:
• The call must be at least 5 seconds long in order to generate the RTCP extended reports.

Configuring RTCP Summary Reports
Use the following procedure to configure RTCP summary reports.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTCP Summary Reports” on page A-37.

Autodial Settings
The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial on an IP phone, the phone automatically
dials a pre-configured number whenever it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows:
• Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset.
• Warmline: The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift the handset before dialing a pre-configured
number. If you do not dial a number within the time allotted, then the IP phone begins to dial the number.
By default, the Autodial feature functions as a hotline. If you want Autodial to function as a warmline, you can use the
Autodial “time-out” parameter to specify the length of time (in seconds) the IP phone waits before dialing a pre-configured number.

4-84

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Global SIP Settings
As administrator, you configure Autodial globally, or on a per-line basis, for an IP phone. The line setting overrides the global setting. For example, you can disable Autodial on a specific line simply by setting the line’s autodial number parameter
to empty (blank).
Warning!
Before configuring Autodial on your IP phone:
• Any speeddial numbers that you configure on an IP phone are not affected by autodial settings.
• If you configure autodial on your IP phone, any lines that function as hotlines do not accept conference calls, transferred calls, and/or intercom calls.

Configuring Autodial Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration files:
Global Configuration:
• sip autodial number
• sip autodial timeout
Per-Line Configuration:
• sip lineN autodial number
• sip lineN autodial timeout

Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial Settings” on page A-104.

Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI.
By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all lines on your IP phone. However, you can
also configure Autodial on a per-line basis.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings.

2.

In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off-hook. An empty (blank) value
disables autodial on the phone.
For example: 8500

3.

In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer as follows:
• If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
• If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-85

Global SIP Settings

Aastra Web UI
Per-Line Configuration
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings.

2.

Perform one of the following actions:
• To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter to enable it, then click Save Settings to
save your changes.
• To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3.

3.

In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off-hook as follows:
• If set to -1, then the global autodial settings for this IP phone to this line.
• If set to empty (blank), then disable Autodial on this line.
• If set to a valid SIP number, dial the SIP number specified for this line. For example: 8500

4.

In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows:
• If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
• If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.

5.

4-86

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Server Protocol

Configuration Server Protocol
You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the configuration server to the IP phone using
any of the following types of protocols: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for which
the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS, you can also specify the port number to use for
downloading the phone configuration. For FTP, you can configure a Username and Password that are authenticated by the
FTP server.
The TFTP setting is the default download protocol. You can configure the type of protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note:
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server, your DHCP
server must support download protocol as referenced in RFC2131 and RFC1541 for Option 66. For more information,
see this chapter, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-3.

Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-16.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Administrator Menu.

3.

Enter your Administrator password.
Note:
The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.

4.

Select Configuration Server.

5.

Select Download Protocol.

6.

Select from the following:
• Use TFTP
• Use FTP
• Use HTTP
• Use HTTPS
Default is “Use TFTP”.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server.

7.

Press Done (8 and 11-Line LCD phones) or Set (3-Line LCD phones) to save the changes.

8.

From the Configuration Server menu, select from the following. This selection is dependent on the Download Protocol you selected in
step 6.
TFTP Settings
FTP Settings
HTTP Settings
HTTPS Settings

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-87

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
9.

Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format).
Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
•
•
•
•
•

Select Primary TFTP
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Pri TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

• Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if required by selecting the
“Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters.
•
•
•
•
•

From the TFTP Settings menu, select Alternate TFTP and press Enter.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Alt TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to
the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative
path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

FTP Settings
•
•
•
•
•

Select FTP Server.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select FTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that
sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

• Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:
•
•
•
•
•
•

4-88

Select FTP Username.
Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done.
Select FTP Password.
Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done or Set.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI

HTTP Settings
•
•
•
•
•

Select HTTP Server
Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
Press Done or Set.
Select HTTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Select HTTP Port.
• Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. Default is 80.
• Press Done or Set.
HTTPS Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Select HTTP Client.
Select Download Server.
Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
Press Done or Set.
Select Download Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Press Done or Set.
Select Client Method.
Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0). For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-33.
Select Download Port.
Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS. Default is 443.
Select HTTPS Server.
Select HTTP->HTTPS.

• For 3-Line LCD Displays:
– Press Change to select “Do not redirect” or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”. Enabling this feature
redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
– Press Set.
• For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
– Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS. Select “No” to not direct HTTPS to HTTPS, Default
is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
– Press Done.
• Select XML HTTP POSTs.
• For 3-Line LCD Displays:
– Press Change to select “Do not block” or “Block”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP
Phone.
• For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
– Press Change to select “Yes” and block XML HTTP Posts. Select “No” to unblock XML HTTP Posts. Default is
“No”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
Note:
For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML
POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-33.
10.

Press Done or Set repeatedly until the session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

11.

Select Restart.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-89

Configuration Server Protocol
For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced button. A keyboard displays.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keyboard. Default is “22222”.

4.

Press Cfg. Svr.

5.

Press the Download Protocol field, and press the value you want the phone to use for downloading from the configuration server. Valid values are:
• TFTP (Default)
• FTP
• HTTP
• HTTPS
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server.

6.

After selecting the download protocol, you must identify specific parameters for that protocol. On the Cfg. Svr screen, press the button associated with the download protocol you selected in step 6.

7.

Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
•
•
•
•

Press TFTP Server.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
Press TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

• Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if required by selecting the
“Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters.
• Press Use Alternate TFTP, and press “Yes” to use an alternate TFTP server.
Default is “No”.
• Press Alternate TFTP Server.
• Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server.
• Press Alt. TFTP Path.
• Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to
the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative
path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
FTP Settings
•
•
•
•

Press FTP Server.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
Press FTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that
sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

• Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:
•
•
•
•

4-90

Press FTP Username.
Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
Press FTP Password.
Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI

HTTP Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•

Press HTTP Server.
Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
Press HTTP Port.
Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. Default is 80.
Press HTTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.

HTTPS Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•

Press HTTPS Server.
Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
Press HTTPS Port.
Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS. Default is 443.
Press HTTPS Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP
Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Press HTTPS Client Method.
• Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0). For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-33.

8.
9.

Press

until the Options List screen displays.

Press Restart to restart the phone for the change to take affect.

For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the Advanced softkey.

3.

Enter the Administrator password using the keypad. Default is “22222”.

4.

Select Configuration Server.

5.

In the Download Protocol field,select the protocol you want the phone to use for downloading from the configuration server. Valid values
are:
• TFTP (Default)
• FTP
• HTTP
• HTTPS
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server.

6.

After selecting the download protocol, you must identify specific parameters for that specific protocol.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-91

Configuration Server Protocol

IP Phone UI
7.

Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
• In the Primary Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
• In the Pri TFTP Path field, enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6867i\configfiles.
• Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if required by selecting the
Use Alt TFTP checkbox and entering the alternate path in the Alt TFTP Path field.
FTP Settings
• In the FTP Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
• In the FTP Path field, enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory,
the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6867i\configfiles.
• Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required by entering them in
the FTP Username and FTP Password fields.
HTTP Settings
• In the HTTP Server field, enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
• In the HTTP Port field, enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over
HTTP. Default is 80.
• In the HTTP Path field, enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6867i\configfiles.
HTTPS Settings
• In the HTTPS Server field, enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
• In the HTTPS Port field, enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over
HTTPS. Default is 443.
• In the HTTPS Path field, enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6867i\configfiles.
• In the HTTPS Client Method field, select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl
3.0 or TLS 1.0). For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-33.

8.

Press the Save softkey.

9.

Restart the phone for the change to take affect.

4-92

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Configuration Server Protocol

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

4-93

Configuration Server Protocol

Aastra Web UI
2.

Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. Default is TFTP.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server. Use the following
table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP
• Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
• Enter the path name in the “TFTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate TFTP" is enabled, you
must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field.
You can also enter a path name for the alternate TFTP server in the “Alternate TFTP Path” field.
FTP
• Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "FTP Server" field.
• Enter the path name in the “FTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory,
the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form
folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required.
• Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field.
• Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password" field.
HTTP
• Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field.
• Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Enter the HTTP port number in the “HTTP Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the
phone over HTTP.
• Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP server in the "XML Push
Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
HTTPS
• Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTPS Server" field.
• Enter the path name in the “HTTPS Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root
directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
• Enter the HTTPS port number in the “HTTPS Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the
phone over HTTPS.
• Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP server in the "XML Push
Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
Note:
For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs,
see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-33.

3.

Click Save Settings to save your settings.
Note:
The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.

4.

4-94

Select Operation->Reset and click Restart.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features
About this Chapter
The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize your IP phone. This chapter describes
each feature and provides procedures for configuring your phone to use these features.

Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic

Page

Operational Features

page 5-4

User Passwords

page 5-4

Administrator Passwords

page 5-7

Locking/Unlocking the Phone

page 5-7

Defining an Emergency Dial Plan

page 5-12

Configurable Emergency Call Behavior

page 5-14

User Dial Plan Setting

page 5-14

Time and Date

page 5-15

Backlight Mode

page 5-27

Display

page 5-28

Background Image on Idle Screen

page 5-30

Configurable Home/Idle Screen Modes

page 5-31

Picture ID Feature

page 5-32

Audio DHSG Headset

page 5-33

Configurable Bluetooth Support

page 5-34

Audio Hi-Q on G.722 Calls

page 5-35

Wideband Audio Equalizer

page 5-35

Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments

page 5-36

Live Dialpad

page 5-37

Language

page 5-38

Minimum Ringer Volume

page 5-49

Locking IP Phone Keys

page 5-49

Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys

page 5-51

Local Dial Plan

page 5-52

Suppressing DTMF Playback

page 5-55

Display DTMF Digits

page 5-55

Filter Out Incoming DTMF Events

page 5-56

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-1

About this Chapter
Topic

Page

Call Waiting

page 5-57

Stuttered Dial Tone

page 5-61

XML Beep Support

page 5-62

Status Scroll Delay

page 5-63

Switch Focus to Ringing Line

page 5-64

Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls

page 5-65

Call Hold Reminder (on Single Hold)

page 5-66

Call Hold Reminder Timer & Frequency

page 5-67

Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout

page 5-68

Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call

page 5-69

Message Waiting Indicator Line

page 5-71

Customizable Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Request URI

page 5-72

DND Key Mode

page 5-73

Call Forward Mode

page 5-75

Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) page 5-77
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In

page 5-79

Group Paging RTP Settings

page 5-82

Speeddial Key Mapping

page 5-84

Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key

page 5-86

Ring Tones and Tone Sets

page 5-87

Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls

page 5-90

No Service Congestion Tone

page 5-91

Priority Alerting

page 5-92

Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)

page 5-98

Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys

page 5-104

Shifting of Softkey Positions for Busy States

page 5-113

Option to Remove the “More” Softkey when Not Required

page 5-113

Increased Number of Displayed Characters for Softkey Line Labels

page 5-117

6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys

page 5-118

Press-and-Hold Speeddial Keypad Keys

page 5-123

6867i Hard Key Reprogramming

page 5-124

Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI

page 5-127

Speeddial Prefixes

page 5-128

Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key

page 5-128

Busy Lamp Field (BLF)

page 5-128

BLF Page Switch Feature

page 5-132

Configurable Display for Blank BLF/List Softkeys

page 5-133

Ring Signal Type for BLF

page 5-133

BLF Subscription Period

page 5-137

5-2

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

About this Chapter
Topic

Page

BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys

page 5-138

Speeddial/Conference Key

page 5-141

Speeddial/MWI Key

page 5-143

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)

page 5-147

Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup

page 5-151

Do Not Disturb (DND)

page 5-154

Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)

page 5-166

BLA Support for Third-Party Registration

page 5-171

P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts

page 5-172

BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)

page 5-172

Shared Call Appearance (SCA) Call Bridging

page 5-174

Park/Pick Up Static and Programmable Configuration

page 5-177

Enhanced Park/Pickup Configuration Method (BroadSoft BroadWorks)

page 5-185

Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)

page 5-188

Call Forwarding

page 5-190

Configuring Call Forward via the IP Phone UI (6867i)

page 5-216

Display Name Customization

page 5-219

Displaying Call Destination for Incoming Calls

page 5-221

Callers List

page 5-221

Customizable Callers List and Services Keys

page 5-224

Missed Calls Indicator

page 5-225

Directory List

page 5-226

Customizable Directory List Key

page 5-235

Voicemail

page 5-235

Visual Indicators for Voicemail on SCA-Configured Lines

page 5-237

PIN and Authorization Code Suppression

page 5-238

XML Customized Services

page 5-239

XML Override for a Locked Phone

page 5-264

Configurable Indication of Terminated Calls

page 5-265

Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)

page 5-265

Custom Ad-Hoc Conference

page 5-269

“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference

page 5-269

Conference/Transfer Support for Live Dial Mode

page 5-270

Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)

page 5-270

Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module

page 5-272

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-3

Operational Features

Operational Features
Description
This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a System Administrator.

User Passwords
A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedures to change the user password.
Note:
The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone
uses the default password instead.

Configuring a User Password
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password Settings” on page A-14.

IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select User Password.

3.

Enter the current user password.

4.

Press Enter.

5.

Enter the new user password.
Note:
The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

6.

Press Enter.

7.

Re-enter the new user password.

8.

Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Password. A keyboard displays.

3.

Press on the “Current Password” text box, and enter the current user password.

4.

Press on the “New Password” text box, and enter the new user password.

5.

Press on the “Re-enter Password” text box, and re-enter the user password.

6.

Press Save. The Options screen displays indicating your changes were saved.

5-4

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
For the 6867i:
1.

Press

to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Lock > Password.

3.

Press on the “Current Password” text box, and enter the current user password.

4.

Press on the “New Password” text box, and enter the new user password.

5.

Press on the “Re-enter Password” text box, and re-enter the user password.

6.

Press Save. The Options screen displays indicating your changes were saved.

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->User Password.

2.

In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.

3.

In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
Note:
The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

4.

In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again.

5.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-5

Operational Features
Resetting a User Password
If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a new password can be entered. The reset
user password feature resets the password to the factory default which is blank (no password).
You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

2.

In the “Reset User Password” field, click Reset.
The following screen displays:

3.

In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank.

4.

In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user.
Note:
The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.

5.

In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password.

6.

Click Save Settings to save the new user password and perform the next procedure.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Lock > Password.

3.

Enter the current password in the  field.

4.

Press the down navigation key and enter the new password in the  field.

5.

Press the down navigation key and enter the new password again in the  field.

6.

Press the Save softkey.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.

5-6

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

Administrator Passwords
An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the configuration files only.
An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP phone. You turn this feature on and off by
entering the "options password enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid values are 0
(false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user
has to enter a password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain access to the
Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the
correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen.

Changing the Administrator Password
Use the following procedure to change the administrator password.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password Settings” on page A-14.

Locking/Unlocking the Phone
A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or
administrator can enter their password to unlock the phone.
You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone:
• Using the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Lock.
• Using the Aastra Web UI via the path Operation->Phone Lock.
• Using the configuration files to configure a softkey as “phonelock”, and then pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
• Using the Aastra Web UI to configure a softkey as “Phone Lock”, and then pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
Note:
All of the methods above configure locking/unlocking of the phone dynamically. Once configured, the feature takes
affect immediately. To unlock the phone, a user or administrator must enter their password.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-7

Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured.
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.
2.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.

3.

Press Lock to lock the phone.

Unlock the phone:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
2.

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.
The phone unlocks.

For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.
2.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Press Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.

3.

Press Yes to lock the phone
The phone locks.

Unlock the phone:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

A “Phone is Locked” screen displays allowing you to press an “Unlock the Phone” button.
2.

Press Unlock the Phone.
A prompt, “Enter Unlock Password” displays as well as a keyboard.

3.

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.
A prompt “Unlock the Phone?” displays.

4.

Press Yes to unlock the phone.
The phone unlocks.

5-8

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.
2.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Select Lock > Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.

3.

Select Yes or press the Lock softkey to lock the phone.

Unlock the phone:
1.

Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
An “Enter Unlock Password” prompt displays.

2.

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.
A prompt “Unlock the Phone?” displays.

3.

Select Yes or press the Unlock softkey to unlock the phone.

Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

Lock the phone:
2.

In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click Lock.
The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.

Unlock the phone:
3.

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

4.

In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click Unlock.
The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is unlocked”.

Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files
Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key)
to use as a lock/unlock key. In the configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-9

Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
To configure a softkey/programmable key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable
Key/Keypad Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key/Hard Key Parameters” on page A-156.

Reference
To use the lock/unlock softkey or programmable key, see “Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Softkey on the IP Phone”
on page 5-10.

Configuring a Lock/Unlock Softkey using the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a softkey on the phone (softkey, programmable key, expansion module key)
to use as a lock/unlock key. In the Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the softkey as “Phone Lock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
Note:
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Softkey Configuration Screen is shown as an example.

2.

Select a key you want to configure for locking/unlocking the phone.

3.

In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Softkey on the IP Phone
After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to use the key on the IP phone.
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.

Press the LOCK softkey.
The phone locks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.
An “Unlock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.

5-10

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Unlock the phone:
1.

Press the UNLOCK softkey.
A password prompt displays.

2.

Enter the user or administrator password and press ENTER.
The phone unlocks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF.
The “Lock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.

For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.

Press the LOCK softkey. The phone locks.
The message “Phone is Locked” displays on the screen.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.

Unlock the phone:
1.

Press the UNLOCK key. The “Unlock” key has a steady ON LED.
A password prompt displays.

2.

Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. Default is “22222”.
A prompt “Unlock the Phone?” displays.

3.

Press Yes to unlock the phone.
The phone unlocks.

For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
Lock the phone:
1.

Press the LOCK softkey. The phone locks.
The message “Phone is Locked” displays on the screen.
The LED for the softkey (if applicable) AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.

Unlock the phone:
1.

Press the UNLOCK softkey.
A password prompt displays.

2.

Enter the user or administrator password and press the

button or Enter softkey. Default is “22222”.

A prompt “Unlock the Phone?” displays.
3.

Press Yes to unlock the phone.
The phone unlocks.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-11

Operational Features

Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a different emergency number for each of the different emergency services.
You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency services. Once you specify the emergency
number(s) on the phone, you can dial those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically dials to those emergency services.
Note:
Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency numbers in your area.
The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones.
Emergency Number

Description

911

A United States emergency number

999

A United Kingdom emergency number

112

An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile phone networks.
In all European Union countries it is also the emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line telephones.

110

A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South America.

Emergency Dial Plan and Pattern Matching
The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching and prepend dial plan functionality.
There are two ways to dial a number on the phone:
• dialing digit-by-digit (i.e., select line and dial)
• dialing by string (i.e., pre-dial then go off-hook)
When a user dials digit-by-digit, the phone adds every digit to a dialed string and checks against the dial plan. If the
phone is not locked, it checks against the regular dial plan. If the phone is locked, it checks against the emergency dial
plan.
When a user dials by string, (pre-dial, speed-dial, etc., and then goes off-hook), and the phone is not locked, it checks to
see if the number matches the emergency dial plan. If it doesn’t match, it blocks the call from going through. If the
phone is locked, and the number matches the emergency dial plan it allows the call to go through.
Adding a prepend to a dial plan also works with both dialing digit-by-digit and dialing by string.

Limitation
The following is a limitation for emergency dial plans with pattern matching:
• Secondary dial tone is not supported.
You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.

Configuring an Emergency Dial Plan
Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for dialing emergency services in your area.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial Plan Settings” on page A-15.

5-12

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Operation->Phone Lock.

2.

In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the number used in your local area to contact emergency services. For multiple numbers, enter a
“|” between each emergency number.
For example:
911|110.
Default for this field is "911|999|112|110". You can enter up to 512 characters in this field.

3.

Click Save Settings to save the emergency dial plan to your phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-13

Operational Features

Configurable Emergency Call Behavior
Administrators have the option of changing the default behavior of the IP phones when an emergency call (i.e. a call
made to an emergency number matching one of the values defined in the “emergency dial plan” parameter) is placed.
If the “emergency call connection hold enabled“ configuration parameter is enabled, the IP phones employ the following behaviors:
• Connection Hold: If an emergency call is placed, the IP phones ensure the voice/audio path and other resources associated with the emergency call are continually active, even if the caller hangs up the phone (i.e. the handset is placed
on-hook).
– If the handset is placed on-hook, the phone automatically switches to speakerphone mode ensuring that the call is
still active. Alternatively, if the handset is taken off-hook, the phone automatically switches to handset mode.
– All softkey and hardkey events (e.g. hold, conference, transfer, end call, park, mute, etc...) are disabled as they may
impede or be disruptive to the active call.
– The phone does not allow for the origination or termination of any call while the phone is connected to the emergency services agent. All incoming calls and pages are ignored and a busy tone is presented to the remote caller.
• Enhanced Called Party Hold: As a complement to the Connection Hold feature, Enhanced Called Party Hold allows
the voice/audio path to be established the moment the emergency call is placed.
– When a caller places a call to an emergency services number, all Connection Hold features are activated, even if the
SIP session has not been established completely.
– Even if the caller abandons the call before the emergency services agent answers, the voice/audio path and Connection Hold features will still be active.
• Forced Disconnect: As the Connection Hold feature ensures that the caller cannot terminate the call, the only way
the call can be terminated is if the emergency services agent forces the disconnection by ending the call himself/herself.
The “emergency call connection hold enabled“ parameter is disabled by default.

Configuring Emergency Call Behavior
Use the following procedures to configure the IP phone’s behavior when emergency calls are placed.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Call Behavior Settings” on page A-15.

User Dial Plan Setting
The IP Phones have a parameter for configuring a dial plan that distinguishes between calling a real PSTN number and a
number that looks like a PSTN number but is actually on an IP network.
This parameter is “sip user parameter dial plan”. Using the configuration files, an Administrator can configure a dial plan
corresponding to a IP network number (i.e. 6xx|8xxxx|9xxxxxxx) that the phone checks before sending the SIP packet.
If for example, the number that was dialed was 645, the phone checks the dial plan and matches the number to the dial
plan (6xx in the example above), before sending out the SIP packet. The SIP packet header omits the user parameter
user=ip (i.e. “To: “) identifying the number as one from an IP network. If the number that
was dialed was 456-2345, the phone tries to match the number to the dial plan before sending out the SIP packet but as
it is not part of the dial plan the phone identifies the number as a PSTN number. The SIP packet header in this case indicates user=phone (i.e., “To: “).
Note:
• Entering a dial plan value for this parameter enables this feature. Entering no value for this parameter in the configuration files, disables this feature.
• You can configure the “sip user parameter dial plan” parameter on a global basis only. If it is misconfigured, then
the parameter is ignored.

5-14

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Configuring the SIP User Parameter Dial Plan
Use the following procedure to configure the SIP user parameter dial plan.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “User Dial Plan Setting” on page A-16.

Limitation
The “sip user parameter dial plan” value is checked AFTER an existing prepend dial plan is checked, so the number that
the phone dials will have prepend digits also.

Time and Date
In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of configuration applies to each feature.
Feature

Method of configuration

Set Time Format

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Set Date Format

Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI

Set Time Zone

IP Phone UI
Configuration Files

Set Daylight Savings Time

IP Phone UI
Configuration Files

Daylight Savings Time (DST) Information
The Aastra IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance change. This change became affective starting
in 2007.
The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in 2007. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will now begin at 2:00 A.M. on the second Sunday in March and revert to Standard time on the first Sunday
in November.
Note:
In previous years, the DST began on the first Sunday of April and ended on the first Sunday of October.
The changes to daylight savings time applies to the U.S. and Canada, but may impact other countries outside North America.
Note:
DST can be set on the phones using the IP Phone UI and configuration files only. For more information, see “Time Zone
& DST” on page 5-15.

Time Zone & DST
There are two ways you can set the time zone on the IP Phones.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-15

Operational Features
Method 1
You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter
in the configuration files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list of time zone names
is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-42. The following is an example:
time zone name: US-Eastern

Method 2
You can use the Time Zone option in the IP Phone UI or your can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration files, and specify a value of “Custom” for this parameter (must use initial caps). The “Custom” option allows you to
customize the time zone for your area using additional configuration parameters. The following is an example using relative time for EST:
time zone name: Custom

The following table identifies the additional time zone and DST parameters you can enter in the configuration files.
Custom Configuration
File Parameter

Description

Example

time zone minutes

The number of minutes the time zone is offset from UTC
time zone minutes: 300
(Coordinated Universal Time). This can be positive (West of
the Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the Prime MeridFor additional values for this parameter, see
ian). The default is Eastern Standard Time (EST) with a value
“Custom Time Zone and DST Settings” on
of 300 (GMT minus 5 hours).
page A-47.

dst minutes

The number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. dst minutes: 60
Valid values are a positive integer between 0 to 60.

dst [start|end] relative date

Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and dst [start|end] relative date: 1
week parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1).

Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST))
dst start month

The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January dst start month: 3
to December).

dst end month

The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January
to December).

dst end month: 4

dst [start |end] week

Not applicable to absolute time.

N/A

dst start day

The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to
31.

dst start day: 15

dst end day

The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31. dst end day: 31

dst start hour

The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0
(midnight) to 23.

dst start hour: 5

dst end hour

The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0
(midnight) to 23.

dst end hour: 23

Relative Time
dst start month

The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January dst start month: 4
to December).

dst end month

The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January
to December).

5-16

dst end month: 5

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
dst start week

Description

Example

The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid
value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

dst start week: 2

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
.
.
.
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
dst end week

The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid
value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.

dst end week: -1

1 = first full week of month
-1 = last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
2 = second full week of month
-2 =second last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
.
.
.
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = fifth last occurrence "dst start day" in the month
dst start day

The day of the specified week in the specified month that
DST starts on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.

dst start day: 2

1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
dst end day

The day of the specified week in the specified month that
DST ends on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.

dst end day: 7

1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
dst start hour

The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0
(midnight) to 23.

dst start hour: 10

dst end hour

The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0
(midnight) to 23.

dst end hour: 23

Example 1
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using relative time (for EST):
time zone name: Custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative
time zone minutes: 300
dst minutes: 60

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-17

Operational Features
Example 2
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using absolute time:
time zone name: Custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 0 #absolute
#start of
dst start
dst start
dst start
#End of
dst end
dst end
dst end

DST
month: 3 #March
week: 2 #second full week
day: 1 #Sunday

DST
month: 11 #November
week: 1 #first full week
day: 1 #Sunday

DHCP Time Offset (Option 2) Support
DHCP Option 42 enables the phone to be configured with the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server addresses. However,
NTP provides the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time so the phone requires the offset from UTC in order to deliver
the correct local time.
A User or Administrator can set the offset of UTC using DHCP Option 2.
An Administrator can enable Option 2 in the configuration files by setting the parameter “time zone name”. If this
parameter contains the DP-Dhcp value, the phone derives the time and date from UTC and the time offset offered by the
DHCP server.
Using the IP Phone UI, a User or Administrator can enable the phone to use DHCP Option 2 by setting the following values from the Country Code list on the phone:
Country Name

Country Code

Dhcp

DP

Note:
The country name, country code, and time zone name are case sensitive.
On the IP Phone UI for 8 and 11-line phones, a User or Administrator can select Preferences->Time and Date->Time
Zone->Others and choose “DP-Dhcp” from the displayed time zone list.
On the IP Phone UI for 3-line phones, you select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Zone->Others and enter “DP” for
the country code, or press “*” and select “Dhcp” from the displayed time zone list.
On the 6739i, a User or Administrator can select Set Time->Timezone->Others and choose “DP-Dhcp” from the displayed time zone list.
If you enable DHCP Option 2 via the IP Phone UI, the change takes place dynamically.
Notes:
• When DHCP Option 2 is enabled on the phone, the phone still uses the values configured for Daylight Savings to
control daylight savings time.
• The default behavior for the phone is to use the NTP server from Option 42 (or current configuration setting) and the
current time zone settings.
• If the time zone name parameter is set to a value other than Dhcp, then DHCP Option 2 is disabled.
References
For more information about setting DP-DHCP for the timezone, see Appendix A, “Time Zone Name” on page A-41.
For more information about setting the country code, see Appendix A, “Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166)” on
page A-138.

5-18

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Custom Time Zone Support
A User or Administrator can also set a custom time zone on the phone to be configured with the Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server addresses. However, NTP provides the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) time so the phone requires the offset
from UTC in order to deliver the correct local time.
On the IP Phone UI for 8 and 11-line phones, a User or Administrator can select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Zone>Others and choose “Custom” from the displayed time zone list.
On the IP Phone UI for 3-line phones, you select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Zone->Others and enter “Custom”
for the country code.
On the 6739i, a User or Administrator can select Set Time->Timezone->Others and choose “Custom” from the displayed
time zone list.
References
For more information about setting a custom timezone, see Appendix A, “Time Zone Name” on page A-41.

Configuring Time and Date Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set a time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the configuration
files.
Configuration Files
For specific date and time parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-40.
For specific parameters you can set for custom time zone settings, see Appendix A, the section, “Custom Time Zone and DST Settings” on page A-47.

Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the
IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

Set Time Format:
2.

Select Time and Date.

3.

Select Time Format.
Valid values are 12 Hour and 24 Hour.
Note:
The default Time Format is 12 Hour.

4.

Use the navigation keys to select the preferred time format.

5.

Press Done to save the Time Format you selected.

Set Date Format:
6.

Select Date Format.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-19

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
7.

Select a date format from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY
Note:
The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).

8.

Press Done to save the Date Format.

Set Time Zone:
9.

Select Time Zone.

10.

For 3-Line LCD Displays:
Press * to display a list of time zones.
For 8 and 11-Line LCD Displays:
Use the navigation keys to view available time zones.
Note:
For more information about setting the time zone to “DP-Dhcp” or “Custom”, see “DHCP Time Offset (Option 2) Support” on page 5-18, “Custom Time Zone Support” on page 5-19, or Appendix A, “Time Zone Name” on page A-41.

11.

Select a Time Zone from the list of values.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-40.
Note:
The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.

12.

Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.

Set Daylight Savings Time:
13.

Select Daylight Savings.

14.

Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• OFF
• 30 min summertime
• 1 hr summertime
• automatic
Note:
The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.

15.

5-20

Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.

Set Time Format:
2.

Press Set Time.

3.

Press Time Format and select a value for the time format on your phone.
Valid values are 12 Hour and 24 Hour.
Note:
The default Time Format is 12 Hour.

Set Date Format:
4.

Press Date Format.

5.

Select a date format from the list of values.
Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY
Note:
The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).

Set Time Zone:
6.

Press Time Zone.

7.

Press a country. Valid values are:
• America
• Asia
• Atlantic
• Australia
• Europe
• Pacific
• Others (DP-Dhcp, Custom)
Note:
For more information about setting the time zone to “DP-Dhcp” or “Custom”, see “DHCP Time Offset (Option 2) Support” on page 5-18, “Custom Time Zone Support” on page 5-19, or Appendix A, “Time Zone Name” on page A-41.

8.

Press a Time Zone from the list of values.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-40.
The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.

9.

Press the

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

to return to the previous screen.

5-21

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
Set Daylight Savings Time:
10.

Press Daylight Savings.

11.

Press a Daylight Savings time option.
Valid values are:
• OFF
• 30 min summertime
• 1 hr summertime
• automatic
Note:
The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.

12.
13.

5-22

Press the
Press the

to return to the previous screen.
button or the

button at any time to return to the idle screen.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

to enter the Options List.

Set Time Format:
2.

Navigate to the Time and Date -> Settings option and press the

button or Select softkey.

3.

With Time Format highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column.

4.

Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired time format. Valid values are 12 Hour and 24 Hour (the default is 12 Hour).

Set Daylight Savings:
5.

Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and press the 4 key to highlight Daylight Savings.

6.

With Daylight Savings highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column.

7.

Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired daylight savings setting. Valid values are:
• Off
• 30 min summertime
• 1h summertime
• Automatic (default)

Set Date Format:
8.

Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and press the 4 key to highlight Date Format.

9.

With Date Format highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column.

10.

Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired date format. Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY

11.

Press the Save softkey to save your changes.

Set Daylight Savings Time:
12.

Navigate to the Time and Date -> Time Zone option and press the
A list of time zones displays for different areas of the world.

button or Select softkey.

13.

Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and highlight the desired region. Valid values are:
• America
• Asia
• Atlantic
• Australia
• Europe
• Pacific
• Others

14.

With the desired region highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column.

15.

Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the time zone that applies to your area. The default time zone is US-Eastern.

16.

Press the Save softkey to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-23

Operational Features
Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.

2.

In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• 12h (12 hour format) (default)
• 24h (24 hour format).
Note:
The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.

3.

In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
• DD MMM YYYY
• WWW DD MMM
• DD MMM
• DD.MM.YYYY
Note:
The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.

4.

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

Time Servers
A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to
the clients in a network. The time server may be a local network time server or an internet time server. The Network Time
Protocol (NTP) is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes time in the network with the time on
the time server.
On the IP phones, you can enable or disable a Time Server to be used to synchronize time on the phones with the Timer
Server you specify. An Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files to enable/disable the
Time Server and specify a Time Server 1, Timer Server 2, and/or Time Server 3. A User can enable/disable the Time Server
using the IP Phone UI or Aastra Web UI only. The Time Server is enabled by default.

5-24

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Setting Time Server Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2,
and/or 3.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server Settings” on page A-45.

Setting Time Server Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.
IP Phone UI
Enable/the Time Server by specifying Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Preferences->Time and Date.

3.

Select Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3.

4.

Enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format. Use the available softkeys to help you enter the information.

5.

Click Done to save your changes.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press Set Time.

3.

Press Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3. A text box displays.

4.

Press the text box and enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format using the keyboard that displays.

5.

Press Enter to save your changes.

6.
7.

Press the

to return to the previous screen.

Press the

button or the

button at any time to return to the idle screen.

For the 6867i:
1.
2.
3.

Press

to enter the Options List.

Select Time and Date -> Set Date and Time.
Ensure there is a checkmark in the box corresponding to the Use Network Time setting. If there is no checkmark, press the
enable the Use Network Time setting.

4.

Press the 2 key to highlight Time Server 1, Time Server 2, or Time Server 3.

5.

Using the keys on the dialpad, enter an IP address or domain name for the time server.

6.

Press the Save softkey to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

button to

5-25

Operational Features
Setting Time Server Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.
Aastra Web UI
1.

Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.

To enable/disable Time Server:
2.

The “NTP Time Server” field is enabled by default. If you need to disable the Time Server, uncheck the box. The Time Server 1, 2, and 3 fields
are grayed out when disabled.

To set Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
3.

Note:
The “Time Server” field must be enabled to enter values in the “Time Server 1, 2, and 3” fields.
In the “Time Server 1”, “Time Server 2”, and/or “Time Server 3” field(s), enter the IP address of the Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3 in your network, in dotted decimal format. Default for this field is 0.0.0.0.
For example, 132.234.5.4

4.

5-26

Click Save Settings to save your changes.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

Backlight Mode
Note:
Applicable to the 6735i, 6737i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, and 6865i IP Phones only.
The 6735i, 6737i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT and 6865i have a backlight feature that allows you to turn the backlight on the
LCD:
• Off - Backlight is always OFF.
• Auto (Default)- Automatically turns ON the backlight when the phone is in use, and then automatically turns OFF the
backlight when the phone is idle after a specified length of time.
“The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of inactivity. The period of time that the phone
waits before turning the backlight off is also configurable.
You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone UI.

Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backlight Mode Settings” on page A-53.
Note:
Using the configuration files, you can set the backlight to Off (always off ) or Auto (On and then off after a period of inactivity).

Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phone using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Preferences.

3.

Select Display.

4.

Select Backlight.

5.

Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone.
Default is “Auto”. Valid options are:
• Off
• Auto (Default)
Note:
Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer.

6.

If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.

7.

If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer.

8.

Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is idle. Valid values are 1 to 7200 seconds. Default is 600 seconds (equals 10 minutes). When this period of time is reached, the phone turns OFF the backlight. Use the "Backspace" and/or "Clear" softkeys to delete entries if required.

9.

Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-27

Operational Features

Display
Note:
Applicable to the 6739i and 6867i IP Phones only.
The Display option on the 6739i and 6867i IP phones allows you to set the following on your phone:
• Brightness Level
• Brightness Timer
• Calibrate Screen (6739i only)

Brightness Level
The "Brightness Level" option allows you to set the amount of light that illuminates the LCD display. Use this option to
set your preference of brightness.

Setting Brightness
For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List

2.

Press the  button.

3.

Press the  button. The following options display.
• Level 1
• Level 2
• Level (default)3
• Level 4
• Level 5

4.

Press the level of brightness you want on your phone. Level 1 is the least bright and Level 5 is the most bright. Default is Level 3.

5.
Press the

to return to the previous menu or press the

to return to the idle screen.

For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.
2.

Press

to enter the Options List.

Navigate to the Display option and press the

button or Select softkey.

3.

Use the3 and 4 navigation buttons to increase or decrease the intensity of brightness on the LCD.

4.

Press the Save softkey to save your changes.

5-28

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Brightness Timer
The "Brightness Timer" option allows you to set the amount of time you want the LCD display to stay illuminated before
turning the backlight off during a period of inactivity. For example, if you set the brightness timer to 60, when the phone
reaches 60 seconds of inactivity, the LCD backlight goes off.

Setting Brightness Timer
For the 6739i:
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List

2.

Press the  button.

3.

Press the  button. A text box displays.

4.

Press the text box. A pop-up keyboard displays.

5.

Press the “123” key and enter a value, in seconds, for the Brightness Timer. You can set the Brightness Timer from 0 to 7200 seconds. Default
is 600 (10 minutes).

6.
Press the

to return to the previous menu or press the

to return to the idle screen.

For the 6867i:
IP Phone UI
1.
2.

Press

to enter the Options List.

Navigate to the Display option and press the

button or Select softkey.

3.

Press the 2 key to highlight Brightness Timer.

4.

Enter a value, in seconds, using the dialpad keys. You can set the timer from 1 to 7200 seconds. Default is 600 (10 minutes).

5.

Press the Save softkey to save your changes.

Configuring the Brightness Level Settings Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to configure the brightness level settings on the 6739i and 6867i.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Brightness Level Settings” on page A-54.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-29

Operational Features
Calibrate Screen (6739i only)
The “Calibrate Screen” option allows you to calibrate the color touchscreen. This process makes fine adjustments to the
color screen on the phone for optimal display purposes.

Calibrating the Screen
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List

2.

Press the  button.

3.

Press the  button.
A “Recalibrate touchscreen?” prompt displays.

4.

Press “Yes” to continue or “No” to cancel the recalibration.

5.

If you press “Yes”, the following messages display:
“Waiting for touchscreen activity to subside....”

6.

Press the screen as indicated by each prompt using a SOFT fine tip stylus pen. Do not use a sharp object such as an ink pen or pencil which
may damage the touch screen.:
“Touch the UPPER-LEFT corner of the screen.”
“Touch the UPPER-RIGHT corner of the screen.”
“Touch the LOWER-RIGHT corner of the screen.”
“Touch the LOWER-LEFT corner of the screen.”
If you touched the screen in the wrong location, the following message displays:
“Received unreliable data. You will be asked to touch the same point again.”
Retouch the screen in the correct location to continue.
The following message displays:
“Validating calibration data....please wait.”
Then the following message and prompt displays:
“Sanity Check OK. Save changes?”

7.

Press the Yes button to complete the recalibration, and the phone automatically restarts.

Background Image on Idle Screen
Note:
Applicable to the 6739i and 6867i IP Phones only.
Administrators can brand the idle screen of the 6739i and 6867i IP phones with their own company logo or image. The
phones can now display a background image in the bottom layer of the idle screen. This image can be set by the new
“background image” parameter. Current text (i.e. screen name, extension, and date/time) and softkeys on the idle
screen are on top of the background image. The background image can be downloaded from your configuration server
using either tftp, ftp, http, and https protocols.

Idle Screen Image Requirements for the 6739i:
• 640 x 480 pixels
• 24-bit color depth
• Both .png and .jpg files are supported
• There should be no frame around the image
• Avoid using images with light-colored elements

5-30

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features
Idle Screen Image Requirements for the 6867i:
• 240x320 pixels
• 24-bit color depth.
• .png files only are supported
• There should be no frame around the image
• Avoid using images with light-colored elements

Configuring Background Image on Idle Screen
Use the following procedures to configure the background image on the idle screen
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Background Image on Idle Screen” on page A-55.

Configurable Home/Idle Screen Modes
Note:
Applicable to the 6867i IP Phone only.
The 6867i IP phone contains two Home/Idle screen layout options. The default primary screen mode provides users with a
larger date and time and displays the Screen Name (“sip screen name”) parameter beside the line number in the top status bar.
Note:
Screen Name 2 (“sip screen name 2”) is not displayed on the 6867i IP phone’s screen when the primary screen mode is
configured for use.
The secondary screen mode displays both the Screen Name and Screen Name 2 parameters. They are displayed above the
smaller, repositioned date and time.
Primary Home/Idle Screen Mode

Secondary Home/Idle Screen Mode

Administrators can switch the home/idle screen to the preferred layout by defining the “idle screen mode” parameter in
the configuration files.

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-31

Operational Features
Switching the 6867i IP Phone’s Home/Idle Screen Mode
Use the following procedures to switch the 6867i IP phones home/idle screen mode.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configurable Home/Idle Screen Modes” on page A-55.

Picture ID Feature
Note:
Applicable to the 6739i and 6867i IP Phones only.
The Picture ID feature on the 6739i and 6867i shows a picture ID of a caller on the LCD for all of the following events on
the phone:
• Incoming Calls (matched to Caller ID numbers)
• Outgoing Calls (matched to dialed numbers)
• Directory entries
• Callers List entries
• Redial List entries
Your Administrator stores the pictures in a centralized picture repository. The pictures are dynamically retrieved from the
centralized server for each call and then locally cached in the phone to reduce network traffic.
If there is no picture on the central server for the dialed number and/or Caller Id number, and Directory, Callers List,
and/or Redial List entry, the generic blue figure image is shown.

Generic
Blue Image

Pictures must be in “.png” format, 150pixels wide x 200pixels tall, and in 24-bit color (the 6867i also supports 32-bit
color). The filenames for pictures must be stored using the phone number as the filename (for example,
9995551234.png). Enabling and disabling Picture ID on the phone can be done by an Administrator using the configuration files only
Note:
The Picture ID feature supports the use of TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS protocols when downloading pictures.
Enabling/Disabling the Picture ID on the Phone Using the Configuration Files
Use the following parameter to enable/disable Picture ID on the phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Picture ID Feature” on page A-56.

5-32

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

Operational Features

Audio DHSG Headset
Note:
Applicable to the 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, 6865i, and 6867i IP Phones only.
DHSG is a standard for telecommunication headsets. The Aastra 6735i, 6737i, 6739i, 6753i, 6755i 6757i, 6757i CT, 6865i,
and 6867i IP Phones support the use of a DHSG headset.
Aastra’s DHSG headset support has been tested and verified with the following products:
• GN Netcom GN 9350, GN 9350e, GN 9120, GN 9125.
All require the GN 14201-10 cable.
• Plantronics CS60, CS70N, CS351N, and Voyager 510S.
All require the APS-1 cable.
• Sennheiser BW900. Requires the TCI01 adapter box.
Use of a non-verified DHSG headset solution is at the customer’s own discretion and the customer should be aware that
some DHSG headsets require an optional cable in order to be electrically DHSG compliant. Aastra is not responsible for any
damage to the IP phone or headset that may result from the use of non-verified headsets, or from incorrectly connecting
headsets or cables.
Warning!
• Only the Aastra DHSG cable should be connected directly to your phone. No 3rd party DHSG cables should be connected directly to the Aastra IP phone. Any damage caused by connecting a 3rd party DHSG headset cable directly
to your phone will void your warranty with Aastra.
• The headset port is for headset use only. Plugging any other devices into this port may cause damage to the phoneandwill void your warranty.
• Customers should read and observe all safety recommendations contained in headset operating guides when using
any headset.

Reference
For more information about installing a DHSG headset on your phone, see the IP Phone-Specific Installation Guide.

Configuring DHSG on the Phone
You can enable or disable the use of a DHSG headset using the parameter “dhsg” in the configuration files, or at the location Options->Preferences->Set Audio->DHSG in the IP Phone UI. Default for DHSG is disabled (OFF).
Configuring DHSG Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to configure the use of a DHSG headset on the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHSG Settings” on page A-56.

Configuring DHSG using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure DHSG using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Select Preferences.

3.

Select Set Audio.

4.

Select DHSG and toggle the DHSG support ON or OFF

41-001343-02 REV04 – 05.2014

5-33

Operational Features

IP Phone UI
5.

If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.

6.

Press Set or Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.

For the 6739i:
1.

Press

on the phone to enter the Options List.

2.

Press the